Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 PDF

1 of 298
1 of 298

Summary of Content for Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 PDF

VOLVO C70

Owners Manual

WEB EDITION

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your

Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of

you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the

world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current

safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend

that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions

and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 00 Introduction

Important information................................. 8

Volvo and the environment....................... 11

01 01 Safety

Seatbelts................................................... 16

Airbag system........................................... 19

Airbags (SRS)............................................ 20

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*. 23

Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 25

Inflatable Curtain (DMIC)........................... 27

WHIPS....................................................... 28

Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)........ 30

When the systems deploy......................... 31

Crash mode.............................................. 33

Child safety............................................... 34 02 02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 40

Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 42

Driver's door control panel....................... 44

Combined instrument panel...................... 45

Indicator and warning symbols................. 46

Information display................................... 50

Electrical socket........................................ 52

Lighting panel........................................... 53

Left-hand stalk switch............................... 55

Right-hand stalk switch............................ 58

Cruise control*.......................................... 60

Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 62

Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn- ing flashers................................................ 63

Parking brake............................................ 64

Power windows......................................... 65

Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 67

Personal preferences................................ 71

HomeLink *.............................................. 73

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Climate control

General information on climate control..... 78

Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 80

Air distribution........................................... 83

Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................... 84

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)......... 87

04 04 Interior

Front seats................................................ 90

Electrically operated roof ......................... 95

Wind deflector*......................................... 99

Interior lighting........................................ 100

Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 102

Cargo area.............................................. 106

05 05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade......... 112

Privacy locking*....................................... 115

Active locks............................................. 117

Keyless drive*.......................................... 118

Battery in remote control key.................. 121

Locking and unlocking............................ 122

Alarm*..................................................... 126

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 06 Starting and driving

General.................................................... 132

Refuelling................................................ 134

Starting the engine.................................. 136

Keyless drive*.......................................... 138

Manual gearbox...................................... 139

Automatic gearbox.................................. 141

Brake system.......................................... 145

DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem*......................................................... 147

Park Assist*............................................. 149

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 151

Towing and recovery.............................. 155

Start assistance...................................... 158

Driving with a trailer................................ 159

Towing equipment*................................. 161

Detachable towbar*................................ 163

Loading................................................... 167

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 168

07 07 Wheels and tyres

General.................................................... 172

Tyre pressure.......................................... 176

Warning triangle* and spare wheel* ....... 179

Changing wheels.................................... 182

Emergency puncture repair*................... 184

08 08 Car care

Cleaning.................................................. 190

Touching up paintwork........................... 194

Rustproofing........................................... 195

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

09 09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service........................................... 198

Self-maintenance.................................... 199

Bonnet and engine compartment........... 200

Oils and fluids......................................... 202

Wiper blades........................................... 207

Battery..................................................... 208

Replacing bulbs...................................... 210

Fuses...................................................... 216 10 10 Infotainment system

General.................................................... 226

Audio functions....................................... 228

Radio functions....................................... 232

CD functions........................................... 237

Menu structure audio system.............. 240

Phone functions*..................................... 241

Menu structure phone*......................... 248

Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 251 11 11 Specifications

Type designation..................................... 258

Dimensions and weights......................... 261

Engine specifications.............................. 264

Engine oil................................................ 265

Fluids and lubricants............................... 269

Fuel......................................................... 271

Catalytic converter.................................. 275

Electrical system..................................... 276

Type approval......................................... 278

Table of contents

6

12 12 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 280

Table of contents

7

Introduction

Important information

8

Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is

to read the owner's manual, ideally before your

first journey. This will give you the opportunity

to familiarise yourself with new functions, to

see how best to handle the car in different sit-

uations, and to make the best use of all the

car's features. Please pay attention to the

safety instructions contained in the manual.

The equipment described in the owner's man-

ual is not present in all cars. In addition to

standard equipment, this manual also

describes options (factory fitted equipment)

and certain accessories (retrofitted extra

equipment). If you are uncertain over what is

standard or option/accessory then we recom-

mend that you contact your Volvo dealer.

Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-

ments of different markets, as well as for

national or local legal requirements and regu-

lations.

The specifications, design features and illus-

trations in this owner's manual are not binding.

We reserve the right to make modifications

without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation

Option All types of option/accessory are marked with

an asterisk .

The range of options/accessories for the dif-

ferent car models varies depending on the mar-

ket. The majority of options are factory fitted

and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-

rofitted.

We recommend that you contact your author-

ised Volvo dealer for more information.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's

manual that is located at the bottom of the

page. This information is an addition to the text

that it refers to via a number. If the footnote

refers to text in a table then letters are used

instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show text

messages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of the

text being slightly larger and printed in grey.

Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-

sage texts on the information display (e.g.

Audio settings).

Decals The car contains different types of decal which

are designed to convey important information

in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the

car have the following descending degree of

importance for the warning/information.

Introduction

Important information

9

Warning for personal injury

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,

white text/image on black message field. Used

to indicate the presence of danger which, if the

warning is ignored, may result in serious per-

sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black or blue warning field and message field.

Used to indicate the presence of danger which,

if the warning is ignored, may result in damage

to property.

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black message field.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a

certain sequence are numbered in the owner's

manual.

Introduction

Important information

10

When there is a series of illustrations for

step-by-step instructions each step is

numbered in the same way as the corres-

ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-

cent to the series of illustrations where the

order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-

bered and are used to illustrate a move-

ment.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

step instructions then the different steps are

numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used

in overview images where different com-

ponents are pointed out. The number

recurs in the position list featured in con-

nection with the illustration that describes

the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of

points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the

right when a section continues on the following

page.

Recording data

The driving and safety systems in the car use

computers which check and share information

with each other on the car's function. One or

more of these computers may store informa-

tion on the systems they check during normal

driving, during the course of a collision or near-

collision. Stored information may be used by:

Volvo Car Corporation

Service or repair workshops

Police or other authorities

Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of

accessories can negatively affect the car's

electrical system. Certain accessories only

function when their associated software is

installed in the car's computer system. We

therefore recommend that you always contact

an authorised Volvo workshop before installing

accessories which are connected to or affect

the electrical system.

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-

mation concerning your car.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G 00

00 00

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-

ration's core values which influence all opera-

tions. We also believe that our customers share

our consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international

environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-

efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-

ration has global ISO certification, which

includes the environmental standard ISO

14001 covering all factories and several of our

other units. We also set requirements for our

partners so that they work systematically with

environmental issues.

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption

in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel

consumption generally results in lower emis-

sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-

sumption. For more information read under the

heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-

cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that

encompasses a clean interior environment as

well as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are well

below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust

and pollen from entering the passenger com-

partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-

rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-

ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-

side.

The system consists of an electronic sensor

and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-

tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

12

the level of certain unhealthy gases such as

carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.

Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,

queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone

and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon

filter.

Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-

sant and comfortable, even for people with

contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Extreme attention has been given to choosing

environmentally-compatible materials. This

means that they also fulfil the requirements in

the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance

towards a healthier passenger compartment

environment.

Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-

pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the

upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning

with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-

tion requirements.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions

for a long service life and low fuel consumption

for your car. In this way you contribute to a

cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops

are entrusted with the service and mainte-

nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-

tem. We make clear demands regarding the

way in which our workshops are designed in

order to prevent spills and discharges into the

environment. Our workshop staff have the

knowledge and the tools required to guarantee

good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental

impact, for example, by driving economically

and by servicing and maintaining the car

according to the instructions in the owner's

manual.

The following advice will help you to do your bit

for the environment: (for further advice on how

you can reduce environmental impact and

drive economically, see page 132).

Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 176.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.

Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from

cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.

Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.

Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down.

Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. We rec- ommend that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice if you are uncer- tain about the disposal of this type of waste.

Service your car regularly.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

These hints will help reduce fuel consumption

without increasing travel time or lessening the

enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

your car, you'll be saving money - and the

Earth's resources.

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

13

The owner's manual and the environment

The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in

this publication comes from FSC certified for-

ests or other controlled sources.

G 02

08 71

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16

Airbag system......................................................................................... 19

Airbags (SRS).......................................................................................... 20

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*............................................... 23

Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 25

Inflatable Curtain (DMIC)......................................................................... 27

WHIPS..................................................................................................... 28

Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)...................................................... 30

When the systems deploy....................................................................... 31

Crash mode............................................................................................ 33

Child safety............................................................................................. 34

01 SAFETY

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

16

General information

G 02

01 04

Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.

Heavy braking can have serious consequences

if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all

passengers use their seatbelts. It is important

that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can

provide maximum protection. Do not lean the

backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed

to protect in a normal seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by

pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud

"click" indicates that the seatbelt has

locked.

Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the

seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not

retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so

that it does not hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly.

during braking and acceleration.

if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following:

do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything

the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)

tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- age. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

WARNING

The rear seat is designed for a maximum of two passengers.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

17

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G 02

01 05

The seatbelt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the

correct way. The diagonal section of the seat-

belt should wrap over the shoulder then be

routed between the breasts and to the side of

the abdomen. The lap section of the seatbelt

should lay flat over the thighs and as low as

possible under the abdomen. It must never

be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack

from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits close to

the body. In addition, check that there are no

twists in the seatbelt.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means that they

must be able to easily operate the foot pedals

and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-

tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-

ble between their abdomen and the steering

wheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G 02

96 52

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten

their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual

reminder. The audio reminder is speed

dependent, and in some cases time depend-

ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof

console and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt

reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two

subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are used. The message is automatically cleared after approx. 30 sec- onds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during a journey. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning ceases when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.

The message on the information display show-

ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-

able. Press the READ button to see stored

messages.

Certain markets An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the

driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At

low speed, the audio reminder will sound for

the first six seconds.

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

18

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelt

tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-

sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a

sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then

provides more effective restraint for occu-

pants.

Seatbelt guide

G 02

01 06

The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver's seat and passenger seat.

The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing better

access to the seatbelt. When getting into and

out of the rear seat, remove the seatbelt from

the seatbelt guide and position it furthest back

on the seatbelt bar. Refit the seatbelt into the

seatbelt guide afterwards.

01 Safety

Airbag system 01

19

Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel

The airbag system1 is continually monitored by

the system's control module. The warning

symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-

minates when the remote control key is turned

to position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after

approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys-

tem1 is working correctly.

As well as the warning symbol, a

message may appear on the dis-

play in appropriate cases. If the

warning symbol malfunctions, the

warning triangle illuminates and

the message SRS AIRBAG

SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS

AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT appears in the display. Volvo rec-

ommends that you contact an authorised

Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

1 Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS, DMIC and ROPS.

01 Safety

Airbags (SRS)01

20

Airbag system

G 02

01 11

SRS system, left-hand drive

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A

sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors

and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To

cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when

compressed. When this occurs, smoke

escapes into the car. This is completely nor-

mal. The entire process, including inflation and

deflation of the airbag, takes place within

tenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

G 02

01 10

SRS system, right-hand drive

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver's side and passenger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags is deployed.

The capacities of the airbags are also adap- ted to the collision force to which they are subjected.

01 Safety

Airbags (SRS) 01

21

G 02

01 13

Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.

Airbag (SRS) on the driver's side

G 02

01 08

The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System) to supplement the protec-

tion afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's

side. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the

steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked

SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Passenger airbag (SRS)

G 02

01 09

The car has an airbag1 to supplement the pro-

tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-

ger side. This airbag is folded up into a com-

partment above the glovebox. Its cover panel

is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and back against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

1 Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS). This can be unselected when the car is ordered.

01 Safety

Airbags (SRS)01

22

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.2

Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Children under 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.

Label Airbag G

03 22

43

Location of decal for front passenger airbag.

2 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)* 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

Key switch off - PACOS

General information The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat

can be deactivated if the car is equipped with

a PACOS switch. For information on how to

activate/deactivate, see under the heading

Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)

is located on the passenger end of the instru-

ment panel and is accessible when the pas-

senger door is open, (see under the heading,

Switch PACOS). Check that the switch is in

the required position. Volvo recommends that

the key blade is used to change position.

For information on the key blade, see

page 113.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag (SRS), but does not have a switch (PACOS), the airbag will always be acti- vated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag

is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the roof panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo recommends that you visit an author- ised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.

Activating/deactivating

G 01

98 00

Switch location.

The airbag is activated. With the switch in

this position, children taller than 140 cm

can sit in the front passenger seat, but

never children in a child seat or on a

booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch

in this position, children in a child seat or

on a booster cushion can sit in the front

passenger seat, but never persons taller

than 140 cm.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*01

24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child who is shorter than 140 cm in a child seat or on a booster cush- ion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

Children taller than 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Messages

G 01

83 46

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS) is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof panel

indicate that the airbag (SRS) for the front pas-

senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-

tration).

G 01

83 44

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS) is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates

that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger

seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned to ignition position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see page 19.

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information on the different igni- tion positions, see page 136.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

25

Side airbag

G 02

01 18

Side airbag locations.

In a side impact collision a large proportion of

the collision force is transferred by the SIPS

(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-

lars, the floor, the roof and other structural

parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-

er's and front passenger seats protect the

chest area and are an important part of the

SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front

seat backrests.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not place any objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed

on the front passenger seat provided that the

car does not have an activated1 passenger air-

bag.

Location

G 02

53 15

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags)01

26

G 02

53 16

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags

and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.

The airbag inflates between the occupant and

the door panel and thereby cushions the initial

impact. The airbag deflates when compressed

by the collision. The side airbag is normally only

deployed on the side of the collision.

Label, side airbag

G 03

22 46

Location of decal for side airbag, driver's side, front, left-hand drive car.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (DMIC) 01

27

Properties

G 02

54 24

The inflatable curtain, DMIC (Door Mounted

Inflatable Curtain), is a supplement to the SIPS

system. It is fitted along the inside of the driv-

er's and passenger doors and protects both

front seat occupants. The inflatable curtain is

activated by sensors in the event of a suffi-

ciently violent collision or if the car is at risk of

overturning. When deployed, the inflatable cur-

tain inflates. The inflatable curtain helps to pre-

vent the driver and front seat passenger from

striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-

ing a collision. The inflatable curtain is

deployed irrespective of whether the roof is

open or closed.

G 02

54 25

WARNING

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for place- ment in these areas.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

WARNING

There is a risk of personal injury if the driver or passenger is leaning against the door panel when the inflatable curtain deploys. This could also compromise the intended protection.

01 Safety

WHIPS01

28

Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS

G 02

03 47

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-

sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-

cially designed head restraints for the front

seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the col-

lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all

have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front

seat backrests are lowered backward to alter

the seating position of the driver and front seat

passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash

injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and

front seat passenger should sit in the centre of

the seat with as little space as possible

between the head and the head restraint.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

29

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G 02

01 25

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat or the passenger seat.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

01 Safety

Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)01

30

ROPS function

G 02

07 97

Roll bars in raised position.

The ROPS system consists of strong roll bars

which are located behind the passengers'

head restraints, as well as sensors. In the event

of a situation where the car is at risk of over-

turning, or in the event of a sufficiently violent

collision from behind, the sensors detect this

and the roll bars rise up behind the passengers'

heads. The roll bars are deployed irrespective

of whether the roof is open or closed.

Volvo recommends that you always contact an

authorised Volvo workshop if the ROPS system

has deployed.

WARNING

Do not carry out any work on the ROPS sys- tem.

Do not place any objects on the ROPS sys- tem or behind the passengers' head restraints.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

31

Activating the systems

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision and/or

overturning.

Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning.

Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA

Inflatable Curtain DMIC In a side-impact accident and/or overturningA

Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision.

Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) In the event of overturning and/or collision from behind.

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have been deployed, the follow-

ing is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The SRS, SIPS, DMIC, belt tensioner and ROPS systems are deployed only once dur- ing a collision.

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy01

32

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

01 Safety

Crash mode 01

33

Driving after a collision

G 02

90 42

If the car is involved in a collision, the text

CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on

the information display. This means that the car

has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a

protective state that is enforced when the col-

lision may have damaged any of the car's vital

functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for

one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.

There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have

checked for indications of fuel leakage, you

may attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and then

reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to

reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to

start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE

MANUAL is still shown on the display then the

car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car

appears to be driveable, hidden damage may

make the car impossible to control once mov-

ing.

Moving the car If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH

MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car

can be moved carefully out of a dangerous

position. Do not move the car further than nec-

essary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in crash mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you always engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to NORMAL MODE after CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in crash mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

Child safety01

34

Children should sit comfortably and safely

The position of a child in the car and the choice

of equipment are dictated by the child's weight

and size. For more information, see

page 35.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit

correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child

to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo's own child safety equipment is

designed for your car. Volvo recommends that

you use Volvo genuine equipment to best

ensure that the mounting points and attach-

ments are correctly positioned and are suffi-

ciently strong.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child seats

G 02

01 28

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Volvo has child safety products that are

designed for and tested by Volvo.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat to

the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or

beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-

age the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child

seat for the correct fitting.

Location of child seats You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger

airbag is not activated1.

a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat.

Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-

senger airbag is activated. A child in the front

passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the

airbag deploys.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated2.

Children shorter than 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23. 2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 23.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label located on instrument panel end face.

Recommended child seats3

Weight/age Front seatA Rear seat

Group 0

max. 10 kg

(0 9 months)

Group 0+

max. 13 kg

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with

the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion

between the child seat and the dashboard.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with the

car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo infant seat - rear-facing child seat, secured with

the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat - rear-facing child seat, secured with the

ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat rear-facing child seat, secured with

the car's seatbelt

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat rear-facing child seat, secured with the

car's seatbelt

Type approval: E1 03301146

3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

. .

01 Safety

Child safety 01

36

Weight/age Front seatA Rear seat

Group 1

9 18 kg

(9 36 months)

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with

the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion

between the child seat and the dashboard.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with the

car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing child seat, secured

with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the

ISOFIX fixture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the

ISOFIX fixture system and straps.B

Type approval: E5 03171

Group 2, 15-25 kg, 3-6 yr Volvo turnable child seat - front-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo turnable child seat - front-facing child seat, secured

with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing child seat, secured

with the car's seatbelt and straps

Type approval: E5 04192

.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

37

Weight/age Front seatA Rear seat

Group 2/3

15 36 kg

(3 12 years)

Volvo Booster cushion with or without backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or without backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo booster cushion with backrest.

Type approval: E1 04301198

Volvo booster cushion with backrest.

Type approval: E1 04301198

A For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23. B To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated4.

Children shorter than 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

G 02

07 98

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system

are concealed behind the lower section of the

rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated

by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see

illustration above).

Press the seat cushion down to access the

mounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions when connecting a child seat to

the ISOFIX mounting points.

4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 23.

G 02

09 01

38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 40

Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 42

Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 44

Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 45

Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 46

Information display.................................................................................. 50

Electrical socket...................................................................................... 52

Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 53

Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 55

Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 58

Cruise control*........................................................................................ 60

Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................ 62

Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 63

Parking brake.......................................................................................... 64

Power windows....................................................................................... 65

Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 67

Personal preferences.............................................................................. 71

HomeLink *............................................................................................ 73

02 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

40

268151210 11 13 14 8 23 24 25

27

30

31

29

3

28

8

7

32

34

33

9

7

6

8

9

16

17

18 22

20

21

19

3

2

1

5

4

G 02

82 06

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

41

Steering wheel adjustment

Opening handle, bonnet

Control panel, windows and door mirrors

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-

puter

Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener

Door handle and lock button.

Indicator lamp, locking

Air vents, dashboard

Air vent for side window

Cruise control

Horn and airbags

Combined instrument panel

Keypad for infotainment system

Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp

washers

Ignition switch

Rearview mirror, interior

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-

bag indicator

Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side

Switch, optional equipment

Switch, passenger compartment auto-

matic lighting

Switch, optional equipment

Switch, passenger compartment lighting,

right-hand side

Display, car settings/audio system etc.

Controls, car settings/audio system etc.

Climate control

Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers

Door handle and lock button

Glovebox

Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (auto-

matic)

Electrical socket and cigarette lighter

Switch, roof control

Parking brake

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

42

269 2523201110 12 9 21 22 24

7

34

33

27

4

30

31

28

29

8

9

3

8

6

2

9

7

4

5

32

1

19

18

17 13

15

14

16

G 01

94 91

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

43

Electrical socket and cigarette lighter

Switch, roof control

Parking brake

Control panel, windows and door mirrors

Glovebox

Door handle and lock button

Indicator lamp, locking

Air vent for side window

Air vents in dashboard

Climate control

Controls, car settings/audio system etc.

Display, car settings/audio system etc.

Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side

Switch, optional equipment

Switch, passenger compartment auto-

matic lighting

Switch, optional equipment

Switch, passenger compartment lighting,

right-hand side

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-

bag indicator

Rearview mirror, interior

Ignition switch

Stalk switch, left

Keypad, steering wheel, left

Combined instrument panel

Horn and airbags

Keypad, steering wheel, right

Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers

Door handle and lock button

Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener

Stalk switch, right

Opening handle, bonnet

Lever, steering wheel adjustment

Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (auto-

matic)

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

02 Instruments and controls

Driver's door control panel

02

44

Driver's door control panel

G 01

82 41

Power windows, all windows down/up

Power windows

Door mirror, left-hand side

Door mirrors, setting

Door mirror, right-hand side

02 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel

02

45

G 02

90 46

Speedometer.

Direction indicators, left.

Warning symbol.

Information display Shows information or

warning messages, outside temperature

and clock. When the outside temperature

is between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake illu-

minates on the display. This warns of icy

roads. The outside temperature gauge

may show a slightly high reading after the

car has been stationary.

Information symbol.

Direction indicator, right.

Tachometer Indicates engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Indicator and warning symbols.

Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, page 56.

Main beam indicator.

Display Display for automatic gear posi-

tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and

cruise control.

Button for trip meter Used to measure

short distances. Short presses on the but-

ton switches between the two trip meters

T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec-

onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.

Temperature gauge - Used for the engine

cooling system. A message will appear on

the display if the temperature becomes too

high and the gauge goes into the red zone.

Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front

of the air intake, for example, reduce the

cooling capacity at high outside tempera-

tures and high engine loads.

Indicator and warning symbols.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

46

Functionality check, symbols

All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate

when the remote control key is turned to posi-

tion II before starting. This is to check that the

symbols are working. When the engine starts,

all the symbols should go out except the hand-

brake symbol, which only goes out when the

brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start within

five seconds, all symbols extin-

guish except the symbols for a

fault in the car's emissions system

and for low oil pressure. Certain

symbols may have no function,

depending on the car's specifica-

tions.

Symbols in the centre of the instrument panel

G 03

07 55

The red warning symbol illumi-

nates when a fault has been indi-

cated which could affect the safety

and/or driveability of the car. An

explanatory text is shown on the

information display at the same time. The sym-

bol remains visible until the fault has been rec-

tified but the text message can be cleared with

the READ button, see page 50. The warning

symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with

other symbols.

When the symbol illuminates:

1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car

further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display. Clear

the message using READ.

The yellow information symbol illu-

minates and a text appears on the

information display. The message

text is cleared using the READ but-

ton, see page 50, or disappears

automatically after a period of time (time

depending on which function is indicated).

The yellow information symbol can also illumi-

nate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or disappear automatically after a time.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 50.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47

Indicator symbols left-hand side

G 02

90 48

Fault in car's emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp

Stability system STC or DSTC

No function

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it

may be due to a fault in the car's

emissions system. Volvo recom-

mends that you seek assistance

from an authorised Volvo work-

shop for inspection.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the

system is not working. The car's

regular brake system continues to

work, but without the ABS func-

tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys-

tem checked if the symbol remains lit.

Volvo recommends that you seek assis-

tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp This symbol is lit when the rear fog

lamp is on.

Stability system STC or DSTC* For information on the system's

functions and symbols, see

page 147.

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during

engine preheating. Preheating

occurs when the temperature is

below -2 C. The car can be started

once the symbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the

level in the fuel tank is low, refuel

as soon as possible.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

48

Indicator symbols right-hand side

G 02

90 49

Indicator symbol for trailer

Parking brake applied

Airbags SRS

Low oil pressure

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Indicator symbol for trailer This symbol flashes when the

direction indicators are used and

the trailer is connected. If the sym-

bol does not flash then one of the

lamps on the trailer or the car is

faulty.

Parking brake applied The symbol illuminates when the

parking brake is applied. Always

pull the parking brake lever to the

end position.

NOTE

The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated

or illuminates while driving, it

means a fault has been detected in

the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or

IC system. Volvo recommends that

drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop

for inspection.

Low oil pressure2

If this symbol illuminates during

driving then the engine's oil pres-

sure is too low. Stop the engine

immediately and check the engine

oil level, top up if necessary. If the

symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal

Volvo recommends that you contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone

in a front seat has not put on their

seatbelt or if someone in a rear

seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging If this symbol illuminates while

driving, a fault has occurred in the

electrical system. Volvo recom-

mends that you visit an authorised

Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake

fluid level may be too low.

2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 50.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

49

Stop the car in a safe place and check the

level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 206. If the reservoir level is below

MIN then the car should not be driven fur-

ther. Volvo recommends that the car is

transported to an authorised Volvo work-

shop to have the brake system checked.

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols

illuminate at the same time, there

may be a fault in the brake force

distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-

ing.

4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check

the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 206.

5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the

symbols are still illuminated, the car can be

driven, with great care, to a workshop to

have the brake system checked. Volvo rec-

ommends that you seek assistance from

an authorised Volvo workshop.

6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN

then the car should not be driven any fur-

ther. Have the car transported to a work-

shop to have the brake system checked.

Volvo recommends that you seek assis-

tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Reminder doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the boot lid

is not properly closed, the driver will be

reminded of this.

Low speed If the car moves at a speed less

than 5 km/h, the information sym-

bol illuminates and DRIVER

DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER

DOOR OPEN or BONNET OPEN is shown on the display. Stop the car safely as

soon as possible and close the door or bonnet.

High speed If the car is moving faster than

10 km/h, the symbol illuminates

and one of the texts indicated in

the preceding paragraph appears

on the display.

Boot lid reminder If the boot lid is open, this informa-

tion symbol will illuminate and

BOOT LID OPEN will appear on

the display.

3 Only cars with alarm.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

50

Messages

G 02

90 50

When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates

the information display shows a supplemen-

tary message.

Press the READ button (1).

Switch between messages with the READ but-

ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory

until the fault is rectified.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.

Message Specification

STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe

manner and turn off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

SERVICE

URGENTA

Volvo recommends

that an authorised

Volvo workshop

checks the car

immediately.

SEE MANUALA Read the Owner's

Manual.

SERVICE

REQUIREDA

Volvo recommends

that an authorised

Volvo workshop

checks the car as

soon as possible.

HIGH ENGINE

TEMP STOP

ENGINE

Stop the car in a safe

manner and turn off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

BOOK TIME FOR

SERVICE

Time to book regular

service. Volvo rec-

ommends that an

authorised Volvo

workshop carries

out the service.

Message Specification

TIME FOR REGU-

LAR SERVICE

Time for regular

service. Volvo rec-

ommends that an

authorised Volvo

workshop carries

out the service. The

timing is determined

by the number of kil-

ometres driven,

number of months

since the last serv-

ice, engine running

time and oil grade.

SERVICE OVER-

DUE

If the service inter-

vals are not followed

then the warranty

does not cover any

damaged parts.

Volvo recommends

that an authorised

Volvo workshop car-

ries out the service.

TRANSMISSION

OIL CHANGE NEE-

DED

Volvo recommends

that an authorised

Volvo workshop

checks the car as

soon as possible.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

51

Message Specification

REMINDER

CHECK OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level.

The message is

shown every

10 000 km (certain

engine variants). For

information on

checking the oil

level, see page 203.

SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER

MANUAL

Diesel particle filter

requires regenera-

tion, see page 273.

STC/DSTC SPIN

CONTROL OFF

The function of the

stability and traction

control system is

reduced, see

page 148 for more

variants.

Message Specification

TRANSMISSION

PERFORMANCE

LOW

The gearbox cannot

handle full capacity.

Drive carefully until

the message clears,

see page 143.

If shown repeatedly

then Volvo recom-

mends that an

authorised Volvo

workshop is contac-

ted.

TRANSMISSION

OIL TEMP HIGH

Drive more smoothly

or stop the car in a

safe manner. Disen-

gage the gear and

run the engine at

idling speed until the

message clears.

TRANSM OIL

TEMP STOP

SAFELY

Critical fault. Stop

the car immediately

in a safe manner.

Volvo recommends

that an authorised

Volvo workshop is

contacted.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket

02

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

12 V electrical socket

G 01

96 21

The electrical socket can be used for 12 V

accessories, such as mobile phone chargers

and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For

the socket to supply current, the remote con-

trol key must be in at least position I.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

Cigarette lighter* Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.

The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

out the lighter and light a cigarette on the

heated coils.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53

General

G 02

01 39

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Light switches

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and

instrument lighting

Front fog lamps*

Opening the fuel filler flap

Rear fog lamp

Posi- tion

Specification

Automatic/deactivated dipped

beam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main

beam and main beam flash

work in this position.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align-

ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-

zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting

the height of the beam.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the

end positions.

3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively

to raise or lower beam alignment.

Cars with Dual Xenon headlamps* have auto-

matic headlamp levelling, so there is no control

(1).

Position/parking lamps

Position/parking lamps can be switched on

irrespective of remote control key position.

Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre

position.

When the remote control key is in position II the

position/parking lamps and number plate light-

ing are always on.

Headlamps

Automatic dipped beam* Dipped beam comes on automatically when

the remote control key is turned to position II,

except when the headlamp control (2) is in the

centre position. If necessary, the automatic

dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec-

ommends that this is performed by an author-

ised Volvo workshop.

Automatic dipped beam, main beam 1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Dipped beam is activated by means of

turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise

to the end position.

3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-

ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the

steering wheel to the end position and

releasing it, see page 55.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The lamps are switched off automatically when

the remote control key is turned to position I or

0.

Instrument lighting

The instrument lighting is switched on when

the remote control key is in position II and the

headlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi-

tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed

during the day and can be controlled manually

at night.

Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter

or dimmer lighting.

Enhanced display lighting

To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,

clock and outside temperature gauge, these

illuminate when the car is unlocked and when

the remote control key is removed from the

ignition switch. The displays extinguish when

the car is locked.

Fog lamps

NOTE

Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.

Front fog lamps* The front fog lamps can be switched on along

with the headlamps or the position lamps/park-

ing lamps.

Press the button (4).

The light in the button (4) illuminates when the

front fog lamps are switched on.

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with

the headlamps or the front fog lamps.

Press the button (6).

The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-

bined instrument panel and the light in the but-

ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is

switched on.

Fuel filler flap

Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when

the car is unlocked, see page 122.

Brake light

The brake light automatically comes on during

braking.

Emergency brake light and automatic

hazard warning flashers* Emergency brake lights (Adaptive Brake

Lights) are activated in the event of sudden

braking or if the ABS brakes are activated. This

function means that the brake light flashes to

immediately alert cars travelling behind.

The system is activated if ABS is used for more

than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-

ing, however, only when braking from speeds

above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is

lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-

mally again and the hazard warning flashers

are switched on automatically. The hazard

warning flashers remain on until the car accel-

erates again but can be deactivated with the

button for hazard warning flashers, see

page 63.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

55

Stalk switch positions

3 4

1

2

1

2

G 02

63 80

Short flash sequence, direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence, direction indi-

cators

Main beam flash and switching from main

to dipped beam

Home safe lighting and switching from

dipped to main beam

Direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to

end position (2).

The stalk switch remains in its end position and

is moved back manually, or automatically by

steering wheel movement.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to

position (1) and release.

The direction indicators flash three times and

the stalk switch returns to its home position.

Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the

steering wheel to position (3).

Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is

released. Main beam flash only works when the

remote control key is inserted in the ignition

switch.

Switching, main and dipped beam

The remote control key must be in position II

and the headlamp control in end position, see

page 53, for main beam to be switched on.

Activating main beam:

Move the stalk switch towards the steering

wheel to the end position (4) and release.

Deactivating main beam:

Move the stalk switch towards the steering

wheel to position (3) and release.

Home safe lighting

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept

switched on to work as home safe lighting after

the car has been locked. The standard delay is

301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90

seconds, see page 72.

1. Remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch.

2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering

wheel to the end position (4) and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Trip computer*

G 02

90 52

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel2 - browse between menus

and options in the trip computer list

RESET2 - resets

Controls To scroll through trip computer information

turn the thumbwheel either up or down in

steps. Continue turning to return to the starting

point.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.

Functions The trip computer displays the following infor-

mation:

AVERAGE SPEED

ACTUAL SPEED MPH*

INSTANTANEOUS

AVERAGE

KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

DSTC, see page 147

AVERAGE SPEED When the ignition is switched off, the average

speed is stored and used as the basis of the

new value when you continue driving. Reset

using the RESET button.

ACTUAL SPEED MPH Current speed is displayed in mph.

INSTANTANEOUS Current fuel consumption is calculated every

second. The information on the display is

updated every couple of seconds. When the

car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.

During the period for regeneration3 fuel con-

sumption may increase, see page 273.

AVERAGE The average fuel consumption is stored when

the ignition is switched off and remains until the

function is reset. Reset using the RESET but-

ton.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.

KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK The range to empty is calculated based on the

average fuel consumption over the last 30 km.

No guaranteed range remains when the display

shows "--- km to empty tank". Refuel as soon

as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a change in driving style or if a fuel-driven heater is used for example.

2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system. 3 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

57

Resetting 1. Select AVERAGE SPEED or AVERAGE

2. Reset with one press on the RESET but-

ton. Press and hold the RESET button for

at least five seconds to reset the average

speed and average consumption at the

same time.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Windscreen wipers

0

0

A

CB

G 02

54 19

Windscreen and headlamp washers

Rain sensor - On/Off

Thumbwheel

Windscreen wipers off The windscreen wipers are off

when the stalk switch is in position

0.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch to make a

single sweep.

Intermittent wiping You can adjust and set a suitable

speed for intermittent wiping. Turn

the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter

interval between sweeps. Turn it

down to increase the delay.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal

speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Windscreen/headlamp washer

Move the stalk switch toward the steering

wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp

washers. The wipers will make several more

sweeps once the stalk switch is released.

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlamps are washed as follows:

Dipped beam selected with the switch on light-

ing panel:

The headlamps are washed the first time the

windscreen is washed. Within the next ten

minutes, they are washed every fifth wash

cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer

interval the headlamps are washed each time.

Parking/position lamps selected with the

switch on the lighting panel:

Dual Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.

Halogen headlamps are not washed.

The switch on the lighting panel is in position

0:

Dual Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.

Halogen headlamps are not washed.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59

Rain sensor*

G 02

90 53

The rain sensor automatically activates the

windscreen wipers based on how much water

it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of

the rain sensor can be adjusted using the

thumbwheel (C), see page 58.

Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-

sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an

extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is

turned upwards).

On/Off When activating the rain sensor, the remote

control key must be in position I or II and the

windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi-

tion 0 (not activated).

Activating the rain sensor:

Press the button (B), see page 58. A display

symbol shows that the rain sensor is

active.

To turn the rain sensor off, either:

1. Press button (B)

2. Press the stalk switch downward to

another wiper program. If the stalk switch

is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,

the wipers make an extra sweep and then

return to rain sensor mode when the stalk

is released to position 0 (not activated), see

page 58.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the remote control key is removed from

the ignition switch or five minutes after the igni-

tion is switched off.

IMPORTANT

At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while the remote control key is in position I or II. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could start swiping and become damaged.

Thumbwheel Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of

wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is

selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain

sensor is selected.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating

G 02

01 41

The controls for cruise control are to the left of

the steering wheel.

Setting the desired speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is

shown on the combined instrument panel.

2. Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed.

CRUISE-ON appears in the combined

instrument panel.

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds

below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G 02

90 54

Increase or decrease the speed by press-

ing and holding + or . The speed of the car

when the button is released is set as the

new speed.

A brief press (less than half a second) on + or

changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.

NOTE

A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.

Temporary disengagement

Press 0 to disengage the cruise control

temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the

combined instrument panel. The speed set

earlier is stored in the memory.

The cruise control is also temporarily disen-

gaged when:

the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed

speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav- elling uphill

the gear selector is moved to position N

wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs

a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than one minute.

1 Depending on engine type.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

Return to the set speed Press this button to resume the

previously set speed. CRUISE

ON appears on the combined

instrument panel.

Disengaging

Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise

control. CRUISE ON clears on the com-

bined instrument panel.

02 Instruments and controls

Keypad in the steering wheel*

02

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Button functions

G 02

01 42

The four buttons at the bottom of the steering

wheel keypad control the radio and the phone.

The function of a button depends on which

system is active. The steering wheel keypad

can be used to scroll between preset stations,

change CD tracks and adjust the volume.

Press and hold one of the arrow keys to

fast forward/reverse or search for the next

station.

The phone must be switched on to adjust audio

system settings. It must be activated with the

ENTER key to enable control of the phone sys-

tem with the arrow keys.

To return to Audio only, press EXIT.

02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers

02

63

Steering wheel adjustment

G 02

01 43

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and reach.

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you best.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the

steering wheel lightly at the same time as

you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Before driving, check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.

Hazard warning flashers

G 02

01 44

Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction

indicators flash) when the car is stopped where

it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press

the button to activate the function.

A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking

activates the hazard warning flashers automat-

ically, see page 54. The function can be deac-

tivated with the button.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.

02 Instruments and controls

Parking brake

02

64

Parking brake (handbrake)

The lever is located between the front seats.

NOTE

The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

WARNING

Make sure that children, other passengers or objects are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when the parking brake is applied or released by the driver.

How to Apply the parking brake 1. Fully depress the foot brake pedal.

2. Pull the lever firmly.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make

sure that the car is at a standstill position.

4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake

lever must be pulled more firmly.

When parking a vehicle always put the gear

selector in position 1 (for manual transmission)

or P (for automatic transmission)

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels

away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the

wheels toward the kerb.

How to release the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,

press the button, release the parking brake

lever and release the button.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

65

Operation

The power windows are operated using the

controls in the doors. The ignition key must be

in position I or II for the power windows to

operate.

The windows continue to work for a limited

amount of time when the car is stopped and

after the remote control key is removed, provi-

ded none of the doors is opened. Operate the

windows with caution.

To open a window:

Depress the front of the control.

To close a window:

Raise the front of the control.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Remote control To operate the power windows with remote

control, see page 112.

WARNING

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.

Driver's door

Driver's door control panel.

Controls, all windows

Rear window controls

Front window controls

The driver can operate all of the power win-

dows from the driver's seat.

The windows can be opened and closed in two

ways:

Manual operation Depress one of the controls (2) or (3) gently or

raise it gently. The power window opens or

closes as long as the switch is actuated.

Automatic operation Fully depress one of the controls (3) or raise it,

then release. The side window will then open

or close automatically. If the window is

obstructed by an object, the movement will

stop. Only the front windows can be closed

automatically.

The control on the passenger door is operated

in the same way as on the driver's door.

All windows simultaneously All windows can be opened and closed simul-

taneously using button (1). The windows are

opened automatically with a short press on the

right-hand side of the button. Close by keeping

the left-hand side of the button pressed in.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

66

WARNING

The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of them being blocked works with both automatic and manual closing, although not with pinch protection deployed.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.

Passenger seat

G 01

95 11

Passenger seat.

The control in the front passenger door oper-

ates that window only.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Interior rearview mirror

G 02

09 88

Bright light from behind could be reflected in

the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

dimming when disturbed by light from behind.

Dimming Control for dimming

Normal position

Dimmed position.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically

dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)

is not available in mirrors with automatic dim-

ming.

Interior rearview mirror with compass*

G 02

09 91

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview

mirror has an integrated display that shows the

compass direction in which the front of the car

is pointing. Eight different directions are shown

with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north

east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Calibrating the compass

G 02

09 92

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The compass is set for the geographic area to

which the car was delivered. The compass

should be calibrated if the car is moved across

several magnetic zones.

1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the

engine running at idling speed.

2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec-

onds. Following which, the character C is

shown (the button is concealed so use a

paper clip for example to press it in).

3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec-

onds. The number of the current magnetic

zone is shown.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

68

4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the

number for the required magnetic zone (1

15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic

zones for the compass.

5. Wait until the display resumes showing the

character C.

6. Following which, press and hold the button

in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand

drive cars and R for right-hand drive.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-

tion is shown in the display, indicating that

calibration is complete.

G 02

01 50

Magnetic zones, Europe.

G 02

01 51

Magnetic zones, Asia.

G 02

01 52

Magnetic zones, South America.

G 02

01 53

Magnetic zones, Australia.

G 02

01 54

Magnetic zones, Africa.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Door mirrors

G 01

82 54

The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors

are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The

rearview mirrors can be operated in ignition

position I and II.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand

door mirror. The light on the button illumi-

nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

goes out.

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving

in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in

ignition position I and II.

Retracting the mirrors 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-

ically stop in the fully retracted position.

WARNING

Both door mirrors are the wide angled type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Folding out the mirrors 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-

ically stop in the fully extended position.

Automatic retracting/extending When the car is locked/unlocked with the

remote control or using the Keyless system,

see page 118, the door mirrors are automati-

cally retracted/extended.

NOTE

The door mirrors will not be extended auto- matically during unlocking if they were retracted using the controls in the door.

If the car is locked with the remote control and is then started, the door mirrors will still be extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Mirror fold on

locking, see page 72 for a description of the

menu system.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be reset to the neutral

position for electric retracting and extending to

work.

1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir-

rors.

2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R

button. The mirrors are now reset to the

neutral.

Home safe and approach lighting The light* in the door mirrors illuminates when

the approach lighting or home safe lighting is

activated.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS* BLIS is an information system that under cer-

tain conditions can help to draw the driver's

attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-

tion in the so-called "blind spot", see

page 151.

Storing door mirror positions The positions of the mirrors are stored when

the car is locked with the remote control. When

the car is unlocked with the same remote con-

trol the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the

stored positions.

Water and dirt-repellent coating*

The front side windows are treated

with a coating which improves the view

in poor weather conditions. For information on

maintenance, see page 192.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. The water and dirt-repel- lent coating could be damaged.

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

71

Possible settings

Personal preferences can be set for some of

the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli-

mate control and audio functions. For audio

functions, see page 228.

Control panel

A

D

B

C

E

G 02

63 07

Control panel.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

Use The settings are shown on the display (A).

Open the menu to enter settings:

1. Press MENU (B).

2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings with

the navigation button (E).

3. Press ENTER (D).

4. Select an alternative with the navigation

button (E).

5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.

Close the menu:

Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec-

ond.

Clock, adjustment

The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa-

rately.

1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow

up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but-

ton (E).

2. Select the number for adjustment using

"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga-

tion button.

3. Press ENTER to start the clock.

NOTE

If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow down" after the final minute number has been adjusted.

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in

cars equipped with ECC:

Select from Low, Normal and High.

Recirculation timer When the timer is active, the air recirculates for

3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air

temperature.

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Select On/Off depending on whether or

not you wish the recirculation timer to be

active.

Reset all Resets the climate function options to the fac-

tory settings.

Car settings

Retract mirrors when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the

remote control the door mirrors can be retrac-

ted/extended automatically. The On/Off options are available.

Reduced guard* The deadlocks function can be temporarily

deactivated and the alarm level reduced if

someone wishes to remain in the car and the

doors have to be locked from the outside. The

Activate once and Ask on exit options are

available, see pages 124 and 128.

Unlock confirm. light The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-

back when the car is unlocked with the remote

control. The On/Off options are available.

Lock confirm. light The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-

back when the car is locked with the remote

control. The On/Off options are available.

Doors auto lock When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the

doors and boot lid can be locked automatically.

The On/Off options are available. Pulling the

door handle twice unlocks and opens the

doors from the inside.

Doors unlock There are two alternatives for unlocking:

All doors one press of the remote control unlocks both doors and the boot lid.

Driver's door first, then all others one press of the remote control unlocks the driver's door. A second press then unlocks the passenger door and the boot lid.

Keyless entry*

All doors - both doors and the boot lid are

unlocked simultaneously1.

Both front doors both front doors are unlocked simultaneously.

Either front door any door or the boot lid can be unlocked separately.

Simultaneous opening of all windows This function can be selected for the unlock

button on the remote control:

Auto. open all windows all windows are opened simultaneously with one long press on the unlock button.

Approach lighting Select the time the car's lights should remain

on when the approach lighting button is

pressed. The following alternatives are availa-

ble: 30/60/90 seconds.

Home safe lighting Select the time the car's lights should remain

on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled

back after the remote control key has been

removed. The following alternatives are avail-

able: 30/60/90 seconds.

Information

VIN number - (Vehicle Identification Num- ber) is the car's unique identity number.

Number of keys - The number of keys registered for the car is shown.

1 Both doors and the boot lid can also be locked simultaneously.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

General

G 03

00 70

HomeLink is a programmable remote control

which can control up to three different devices

(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-

ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so

replace their remote controls. HomeLink is

supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

The HomeLink panel consists of three pro-

grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if the car is locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car).

Erase the programming for the buttons when selling the car.

Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars equipped with HomeLink. This could have a negative effect on the HomeLink function.

Operation

When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be

used in place of the separate original remote

controls.

Depress the programmed button to activate

the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-

cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-

ton is kept depressed.

NOTE

In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course be

used in parallel with HomeLink .

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in

HomeLink and must not be carried out when

only one individual button is being reprogram-

med.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not

release until the indicator lamp starts to

flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-

ing indicates that HomeLink is set in

"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-

grammed.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Position the original remote control

5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-

cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required

between the original remote control and

HomeLink depends on the programming

of the device in question. Perhaps several

attempts will be required at different dis-

tances. Maintain each position for approx.

15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remote

control and the button to be programmed

on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not

release the buttons until the indicator lamp

has changed over from slow to rapid flash-

ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the

programmed button on HomeLink and

watching the indicator lamp:

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed

HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro-

grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button1" on the

receiver for the garage door for example,

normally located close to the antenna's

bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-

culty in finding the button - consult the

supplier's manual, or contact the supplier

via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programming

button". The button flashes for

approx. 30 seconds and the next step must

be carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on

HomeLink , while the "programming but-

ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for

approx. 3 seconds and then release.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

up to 3 times to conclude the program-

ming.

Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button, proceed in

accordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button on

HomeLink and do not release until step 3

has been completed.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink

starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,

position the original remote control

5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-

cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required

between the original remote control and

HomeLink depends on the programming of

the device in question. Perhaps several

attempts will be required at different dis-

tances. Maintain each position for approx.

15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remote

control. The indicator lamp will start to

flash. When the flashing has changed over

from a slow to a rapid flashing - release

both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates

successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the

programmed button on HomeLink and

watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed

HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro-

grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button2" on the

receiver for the garage door for example,

normally located close to the antenna's

bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-

culty in finding the button - consult the

supplier's manual, or contact the supplier

via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programming

button". The button flashes for approx. 30

seconds and the next step must be carried

out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on

HomeLink , while the "programming but-

ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for

approx. 3 seconds and then release.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

up to 3 times to conclude the program-

ming.

Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for

all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual

buttons.

Depress the two outer buttons and do not

release until the indicator lamp starts to

flash after approx. 20 seconds.

> HomeLink is now set in so-called

"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-

grammed once more, see page 73.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

G 02

09 06

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on climate control................................................... 78

Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 80

Air distribution......................................................................................... 83

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 84

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....................................................... 87

03 CLIMATE CONTROL

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

78

Air conditioning

The climate control system cools or heats as

well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger

compartment. The car is equipped with either

manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,

Electronic Climate Control).

NOTE

The air conditioning system can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the passenger compartment and pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.

Misting windows

Remove misting on the insides of the windows

by first using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-

dows with a normal window cleaning agent.

Ice and snow

Remove ice and snow from the climate control

air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the

windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair

Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault

tracing and repair of the climate control system

to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Refrigerant

The air conditioning system contains R134a

refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-

rine, which means that it is harmless to the

ozone layer. The system must only be charged

with R134a refrigerant, see also page 269.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo

workshop carries out this work.

Passenger compartment filter

All air entering the car's passenger compart-

ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must

be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the

Volvo Service Programme for the recom-

mended replacement intervals. If the car is

used in a severely contaminated environment,

it may be necessary to replace the filter more

often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

Display

There is a display above the climate control

panel. This displays climate control settings.

Personal preferences

You can set preferences for two climate control

functions:

Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to cars with ECC).

Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air.

For information about these settings, see

page 71.

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

79

Air vents in the dashboard

G 01

99 42

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents towards the side windows

to remove misting from the front side windows.

During cold weather - Close the centre vents

for optimum comfort and best demisting.

ECC

Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the

physical experience with reference to factors

such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation

in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor which

detects the side from which the sun is shining

into the passenger compartment. This means

that the temperature can differ between the

right and left-hand air vents despite the con-

trols being set for the same temperature on

both sides.

Sensor location

The sun sensor is on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is behind the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.

The humidity sensor is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-

isfactorily, close all side windows and the roof.

Acceleration The air conditioning system switches off tem-

porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a

temporary rise in temperature.

Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air

conditioning may drip under the car. This is

normal.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Control panel

6

7

3

4

9

5

1 10

8

5

2

G 02

63 09

AUTO

Fan

Recirculation/Air quality system

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature selector

Functions

1. AUTO The AUTO function automat-

ically regulates climate con-

trol and maintains the

selected temperature. The

AUTO function controls heat-

ing, air conditioning, fan

speed, recirculation, and air

distribution.

When the roof is open more air and heat/cold

is directed down in the passenger compart-

ment, and the output of the climate control is

limited if it is not possible to compensate for

the outside temperature

If you select one or more manual functions, the

other functions continue to be controlled auto-

matically. All manual settings are switched off

when AUTO is switched on. The display shows

AUTO CLIMATE.

2. Fan Turn the knob to increase or

decrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed is

regulated automatically. The

previously set fan speed is

disengaged.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

NOTE

If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.

3. Recirculation The function is selected to

shut out bad air, exhaust

gases etc. from the passen-

ger compartment. The air in

the passenger compartment

is recirculated, i.e. no outside

air is taken into the car when

this function is activated. If the air in the car

recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-

ing on the insides of the windows.

Timer The timer function reduces the risk of icing,

misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).

To activate/deactivate the function see

page 71.

NOTE

When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

3. Air quality system* Same button as recirculation.

The air quality system con-

sists of a multi-filter and a

sensor. The filter separates

gases and particles to reduce

the levels of odours and pol-

lution in the passenger compartment. When

the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air

intakes are closed and the air in the passenger

compartment is recirculated. A green light (A)

illuminates in the button when the air quality

sensor is active.

G 00

00 00

Activating the air quality sensor:

Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality

sensor (normal setting).

Or:

Switch between three functions by press-

ing repeatedly the recirculation button.

Air quality sensor engaged the light (A) illuminates.

No recirculation engaged, provided it is not required for cooling in hot weather light not illuminated.

Recirculation engaged the light (M) illu- minates.

Keep the following in mind:

As a rule, the air quality sensor should always be engaged.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

The defroster functions for the front, side and rear windows can be used to demist the windows.

4. Defroster Used to quickly remove mist-

ing and ice from the wind-

screen and side windows. Air

flows to the windows at high

fan speed. The light in the

defroster button illuminates

when the function is active.

The following also takes place when the

defroster function is activated in order to pro-

vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-

ger compartment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (6))

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climate

control returns to the previous settings.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

5. Air distribution The airflow can be distributed

to the windows, dashboard

vents or floor by pressing the

air distribution buttons.

A symbol on the display

above the climate control

panel and an illuminated light in the relevant

button indicate which function has been

selected.

Refer to the table on page 83.

6. AC On/Off (ON/OFF) ON: The air conditioning is on.

It is controlled by the system's

AUTO function. This way,

incoming air is cooled and

dehumidified.

OFF: Off

When the defroster function is activated the air

conditioning is automatically switched on (can

be switched off with the AC button).

NOTE

The climate control system's demisting function with humidity sensor is significantly reduced with the air conditioning in deacti- vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually selected air distribution and fan speed.

7 and 8. Heated front seats* To activate front seat heating:

Higher heat:

Press the button once both lights illumi-

nate.

Lower heat:

Press the button twice - one light illumi-

nates.

Heat off:

Press the button three times light not illu-

minated.

9. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters Heating is used to quickly

remove misting and ice from

the rear window and door mir-

rors. Press the button once to

start simultaneous rear win-

dow and rearview mirror

defrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto-

matically. Switch off manually with one press

on the button. Automatic switching off discon-

nects the rear window and door mirrors after

12 20 minutes depending on outside tem-

perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con-

tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear

window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.

The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted

to the outside temperature. This function must

be switched off manually.

10. Temperature selector The temperatures on the

driver and passenger sides

can be set independently.

Press the button once to acti-

vate one side only. Press

again to activate the other

side. Press the button a third time to activate

both sides.

The active side is indicated by the button's light

and in the display above the climate control

panel.

When the car is started, the most recent setting

is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

03 Climate control

Air distribution

03

83

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the air vents. The

air is not recirculated. Air

conditioning is always

engaged.

to remove ice and

misting quickly.

Air to the floor and windows.

Some air flows from the dash-

board air vents.

to ensure comfortable

conditions and good

demisting in cold or

humid weather.

Air to windscreen and side

windows. Some air flows

from the air vents.

to prevent misting

and icing in a cold and

humid climate. (Not

for low fan speed.)

Air to floor and from dash-

board air vents.

in sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Airflow to windows and from

dashboard air vents.

to ensure good com-

fort in warm, dry

weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows to

the dashboard air vents and

windows.

to warm the feet.

Airflow to the head and

chest from the dashboard

air vents.

to ensure efficient

cooling in warm

weather.

Airflow to windows, from

dashboard air vents and to

the floor.

to provide cooler air for

the feet or warmer air

to the upper body in

cold weather or hot,

dry weather.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information about heaters

The parking heater heats the engine and pas-

senger compartment and can be started

directly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using the

timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car

is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-

tem calculates when heating should be started

based on the outside temperature.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-

ture exceeds 15 C. At 10 C or lower the

maximum running time of the parking heater is

50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the petrol or diesel heater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

G 00

76 32

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows PARK HEAT ON.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of

the car should point downhill to ensure that

there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel

level is too low, the parking heater is switched

off automatically and a message appears on

the information display.

Acknowledge the message by pressing the

indicator stalk READ button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85

Activating the heater

G 02

90 52

READ button

Thumbwheel1

RESETbutton1

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer's settings or

DIRECT START is activated, the

information symbol in the com-

bined instrument panel illuminates

and the information display shows

an explanatory text.

Display Specification

FUEL HEATER ON The heater is

switched on and

running.

TIMER IS SET FOR

FUEL HEATER

Reminder that the

heater will start at

the set time after the

car has been left,

when the remote

control key is

removed from the

ignition switch.

Display Specification

HEATER STOP-

PED - LOW BAT-

TERY

The heater has been

stopped by the car's

electronics in order

to facilitate starting

the engine.

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW FUEL

LEVEL

The heater has been

stopped by the car's

electronics in order

to facilitate starting

the engine as well as

50 km driving.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT

START.

2. Press the RESET button to select between

ON and OFF.

ON: Parking heater switched on manually or

with programmed timer.

OFF: Parking heater switched off.

With the direct start of the heater it will be acti-

vated for 50 minutes.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Heating of the passenger compartment will

begin as soon as the engine coolant has

reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heated

is specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK

HEAT TIMER 1.

2. Briefly press the RESET button so that the

hours setting starts to flash.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb-

wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-

ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using the

thumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can

be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with

the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way as

TIMER 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater A timer-started heater can be switched off

manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-

ceed as follows:

1. Press the READ button.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text

PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT

TIMER 2.

The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

The text OFF is shown with a constant

glow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off in

accordance with the instructions in the section

"Direct start and immediate stop".

Clock/timer The heater's time is connected to the car's

clock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

Auxiliary heater (diesel)

In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may

be required for achieving the correct tempera-

ture in the engine and passenger compartment

during cold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extra

heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when

the correct temperature is reached or when the

engine is switched off.

NOTE

The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on or off manually but is only controlled by the car's electronics.

When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

G 02

09 08

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front seats.............................................................................................. 90

Electrically operated roof ....................................................................... 95

Wind deflector*....................................................................................... 99

Interior lighting...................................................................................... 100

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 102

Cargo area............................................................................................ 106

04 INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04

90

Seating position

The driver's and passenger seats can be

adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving

positions.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust

the distance to the steering wheel and ped-

als. Check that the seat is locked after

changing the position setting.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Lumbar support1, turn the wheel.

Backrest rake: turn the wheel.

Control panel for power seat*.

Lever (2) is not available on all seat models.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat and adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set- ting off, never while driving.

Check that the seat is locked in position.

NOTE

When putting on the seatbelt it is easiest to pick it up from down at the seatbelt guide, not over the shoulder.

Entry to the rear seat

Handle for lowering the backrest

Button for moving the power seat longitu-

dinally

NOTE

No one may sit in the seat when it is pushed forward for entry into the rear seat.

1 Also applies to power seat.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

91

Manual seat

NOTE

Lower the seat before it is pushed forward - otherwise there is a risk that the head restraint makes contact with the sun visor.

Push the seat forward:

Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt

guide, see also page 18.

Lift the handle

Fold the backrest forward to the locked

position.

4. Push the seat forward.

Push the seat backward:

Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.

2. Push the seat backward.

3. Adjust the seat longitudinally.

4. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.

Position memory If the seat does not return to the same position,

as before it was folded for entry, after having

been pushed back - then reset the position

memory as follows:

1. Sit down in the seat.

2. Lift the handle (1), see page 90, and push

the seat to the rear end position

04 Interior

Front seats

04

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Continue to lift of the handle, and push the

seat forward to the desired position and

release the handle.

Power seat* Push the seat forward:

Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt

guide, see also page 18.

Lift the handle.

Fold the backrest forward to the locked

position.

Hold down the front section of the button.

If the seat is set in a higher position - then

it will be lowered automatically to avoid the

head restraint making contact with the sun

visor.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Push the seat backward

Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.

Hold down the rear section of the button.

3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.

NOTE

The seat can only be moved to the very front (+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to and from the rear seat when the backrest has been folded forward. If the backrest is folded back when the seat is in the front position then the seat automatically moves back approx. 6 cm after a few seconds.

WARNING

Check that the backrest is properly folded back by pushing and pulling the head restraint.

The belt on the front passenger side must be

in the belt guide during driving, even when

there is no passenger sitting in the seat.

Floor mats*

Volvo supplies floor carpets which are espe-

cially produced for your car.

WARNING

The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.

Power seat*

G 02

01 99

The seats can be adjusted for a certain time

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol key without the key being inserted into the

ignition switch. The seat can always be

adjusted in ignition position I or II.

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat, forwards/backwards

Seat, up/down

Backrest rake

An overload protection is deployed if one of the

seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the

ignition and wait a short time before adjusting

04 Interior

Front seats

04

94

the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings

can be adjusted at a time.

Memory function

G 02

02 00

Buttons for memory function.

Store setting 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Press and hold button M while pressing

button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.

Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the

seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release

the button then the movement of the seat will

stop.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

any of the buttons to stop the function.

WARNING

Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.

Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.

Ensure that none of the rear seat passen- gers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Memory in remote control key The positions of the driver's seat and the door

mirrors are stored in the memory for the remote

control key with which the car is locked. When

the car is unlocked with the same remote con-

trol key the driver's seat and the door mirrors

adopt the stored positions when the driver's

door is opened.

NOTE

The remote control key memory is inde- pendent of seat memory.

04 Interior

Electrically operated roof

04

95

Conditions for roof operation

No objects on the parcel shelf.

No ice, snow or loose objects on the roof or boot lid.

Dry roof.

2.0 m clearance upward (A) and 0.2 m between the bumper and objects behind (B).

Ambient temperature -10 C or warmer.

Closed cargo separator, see page 106.

Closed boot lid.

Stationary car, brake pedal depressed.

If the instructions on the following pages are

not followed then this could cause damage to

the roof's opening and closing mechanisms.

Volvo also recommends that the following is

observed:

Level ground.

Execution of roof operation in one single movement.

Engine at idling speed.

A

B

G 02

08 00

IMPORTANT

Water collecting on the roof can run down into the cargo area and the passenger com- partment if the roof is opened.

WARNING

People, children or objects can be trapped by the roof or boot lid's moving parts.

Operate the roof with caution.

See decal on the cargo separator.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Do not leave the roof in a stationary position for longer than necessary.

WARNING

Never leave the remote control key in the car if there are children left in the car.

04 Interior

Electrically operated roof

04

96

Hatch cover

G 02

08 01

When the roof is open there is a hatch cover

between the head restraints in the rear seat and

the boot lid, see the preceding illustration.

IMPORTANT

Do not sit on the hatch cover or use it as a support as it could be damaged.

Opening and closing the roof

G 01

83 51

Close the roof

Open the roof

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

Preferably starting the engine.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Keep the left-hand button (1) pressed in to

close, or the right-hand button (2) to open.

Pay attention to any messages on the informa-

tion display while the roof is in motion. The

windows that are closed are

opened approx.10 centimetres. All windows

are closed when the movement of the roof is

completed.

Release the button when a signal sounds and

the message ROOF CLOSED or ROOF

OPEN is shown on the information display.

WARNING

Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic system that is located under the rear seat cushion. Only service personnel are allowed to use the hydraulic system's emergency release function.

Consequences:

significant risk of crushing injury

uncontrolled movement/opening of the electrically operated roof or boot lid

the roof components could be destroyed.

Make thoroughly sure that the conditions are fulfilled before operating the roof.

Text on the information display A number of these messages also apply to

loading assistance, see page 106.

PRESS BRAKE FOR ROOF OPERATION - Depress the brake pedal in order to operate the roof.

CLOSE BOOT FOR ROOF OPERATION - The boot lid is not closed. Close the boot lid.

04 Interior

Electrically operated roof

04

97

OPEN BOOT LID FULLY - Open boot lid fully.

CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT. - The cargo separator is not closed. Close the cargo separator, see page 106.

LOW BATTERY FOR ROOF OPERATION. - The battery voltage is too low. The roof can only be closed. Charge the battery, e.g. by starting the engine, and try again.

ROOF NOT LOCKED - The roof has not been opened or closed properly. Try again to open or close the roof.

ROOF IN LOAD AID POSITION - The roof has been raised with the loading assis- tance function. Lower the roof, see page 106.

TEMP LIMITS ROOF OPERATION - The roof system is either overheated or the out- side temperature is below -10 C. If the roof is overheated, wait approx. 5 minutes until the message clears and try again.

Messages with roof faults Two messages can be shown on the informa-

tion display in the event of a roof fault:

ROOF FAILURE SERVICE REQUIRED - The roof cannot be operated. This requires service by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Covering over can be performed in accord- ance with the instructions.

ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL - The roof or loading assistance must be operated in accordance with special instructions. Service must be performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Special instructions for manoeuvring in

the event of a roof fault If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE

MANUAL is shown on the information display

then the roof cannot be operated normally.

NOTE

After the roof has been closed it cannot be opened again.

IMPORTANT

Closing in the event of a roof fault requires very careful checking of the conditions for operating the roof, see page 95. Even if the conditions are fulfilled, there is a significant risk of material damage.

1. Keep the closing button pressed in until

ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL is shown

on the display. Following which, release

the button.

2. Press the closing button again. Press the

closing button again. Keep it pressed in for

at least 30 seconds until the roof and boot

lid are closed. Pay attention for any faults

that could cause damage to the car.

A signal sounds during the whole closing oper-

ation.

WARNING

Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic system that is located under the rear seat cushion. Only service personnel are allowed to use the hydraulic system's emergency release function.

Consequences:

significant risk of crushing injury

uncontrolled movement/opening of the electrically operated roof or boot lid

the roof components could be destroyed.

Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- ence in the roof system could cause mal- function and serious injury as a result.

04 Interior

Electrically operated roof

04

98

Plastic cover for temporary covering

G 02

08 02

Clamping of the plastic cover between the

wiper blades and the windscreen

Hook at front wheel housing

Hole in plastic cover for rearview mirror

Hook at rear wheel housing

Hole in plastic cover for antenna

Hooks at rear bumper

If the roof cannot be closed due to low battery

voltage or a possible roof fault then a protective

plastic cover can be fitted. The plastic cover is

fitted with the rope attachments inward.

The plastic cover is stored in a bag marked

"Cover for temporary use".

G 02

08 03

Plastic cover, located in the ski hatch.

1. Raise the windows (if possible).

2. Take the plastic cover from the centre

panel in the rear seat backrest at the ski

hatch.

3. Take the plastic cover from the package

and unwrap it.

4. Thread the hole (3) over the door mirror and

secure the hooks (2) in the front wheel

arches.

5. Clamp the plastic cover between the wiper

blades and the windscreen and stretch the

plastic so that it has one tuck (1) per wiper

blade.

6. Guide through the antenna (5).

7. Secure the hooks (4) in the rear wheel

arches and the hooks (6) under the rear

bumper.

04 Interior

Wind deflector*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

General

G 02

08 04

The wind deflector can be used when driving

with a lowered roof to reduce the swirling air-

flow and draughts in the passenger compart-

ment.

Installing the wind deflector 1. Fold out the four-part deflector to is full size

and press the catch together.

2. Insert the wind deflector's supports under

the head restraints so that they are resting

against the top edge of the backrest.

3. Press the locking levers into the holders on

the side panels until a click is heard.

4. Open out the wind deflector.

NOTE

Be careful of the car's upholstery.

The zips in the wind deflector are used for stor-

ing/retrieving luggage on the rear seat.

WARNING

Check that the wind deflector is secured firmly. Otherwise it may detach in the event of sudden movement for example and then cause injury and damage.

WARNING

No passengers are allowed in the rear seat when the wind deflector is fitted.

The deflector is stored in the cargo area in its

bag, under the cargo separator, furthest for-

ward against the backrest.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Reading lamps and interior lighting

G 02

08 05

Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off

Interior lighting

Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off

All lighting in the passenger compartment can

be switched on in ignition position I and II as

well as when the engine is running. The lighting

can also be activated within 30 minutes after:

the engine has been switched off and the ignition is in position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Roof lighting The reading lamps are switched on or off by

pressing the relevant button in the roof con-

sole.

Rear seat lighting

G 02

08 06

Switched on or off with one press of the button.

Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-

ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-

tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror*

G 02

02 10

The lamp is automatically switched on and off

respectively when the cover is opened or

closed.

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and off

respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

101

Automatic lighting

Using the switch (2), see page 100, three posi-

tions can be selected for the lighting the pas-

senger compartment:

Off right-hand side (marked with 0) depressed, automatic lighting switched off.

Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated. The dimmer function is active.

On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

Neutral position When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas-

senger compartment lighting is switched on

and off automatically in accordance with the

below.

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade.

the engine is stopped and the remote con- trol key is turned to position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched

off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked with the key or remote control key.

Passenger compartment lighting comes on

and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors

is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the

car is locked then it will be switched off auto-

matically after 5 minutes.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

102

Storage spaces

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

Storage compartment in door panel (lock-

able*).

Coat hanger, only for light garments.

Storage pocket on front edge of front seat

cushions.

Ticket clip

Glovebox

Storage compartment behind the centre

console

Cup holder (with roller cover*)

Tunnel compartment (e.g. for CDs)

Cup holder (with roller cover*)

Storage compartment in rear side panel.

Storage pocket on rear of front seats.

WARNING

Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Glovebox

G 02

42 08

The owner's manual and maps can be kept

here for example. There are also holders for

coins, pens and fuel cards.

The glovebox can be locked with the remote

control key's detachable key blade. Further

information is available on page 113.

Coat hanger

The coat hanger is located on the passenger

seat head restraint. Only hang light garments

on the hanger.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Storage compartment in door panel

G 03

04 07

The storage compartment is opened by lifting

the lower front edge of the lid, and closed with

a touch on its upper section.

Lockable storage compartment in door

panel* The storage compartment is locked with the

remote control key, see page 115.

Storage compartment in rear side panel

G 02

08 07

The storage compartment is opened and

closed with a touch in the centre of its upper

section.

Storage under the front armrest

G 01

83 71

There is a storage space under the armrest.

There is also a smaller storage space in the

detachable armrest. Press the small button

and lift the armrest to open the shallow com-

partment. Press the large button and lift the

armrest to open the deeper compartment.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

G 02

67 04

In the deeper compartment there is space for

10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored

vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have

space.

Cup holder in centre console

G 01

83 72

There is space for a double cup holder under

the roller cover. The space can be used for

storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the

rear edge of the cup holder where there is a

recess.

If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its

two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front

edge of the space and then press down the

rear edge of the cup holder.

The cup holder cannot be lifted out from cars

which have alarm with movement detector*.

Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal

objects in the cup holder as such objects could

accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 126.

Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge

from below and pulling forward.

Storage compartment behind the handbrake

G 01

96 24

When there are no buttons for parking assis-

tance and BLIS, see page 149 and page

152, the space can be used as a storage com-

partment.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

106

Cargo separator

G 02

08 45

The purpose of the separator is to limit the

amount of the load in the cargo area so that the

movement of the roof is not disrupted. Be sure

to close the cargo separator fully so that it is

locked on both the left and right-hand sides.

IMPORTANT

Do not place objects above or alongside the cargo separator when it is closed. Do not position luggage so that it is higher that the closed cargo separator.

G 02

08 47

Label on cargo separator.

NOTE

Too much load in the cargo area prevents the cargo separator from being closed. Consequently the roof is also prevented from opening.

Loading assistance

G 02

08 48

Button for raising and lowering the roof.

In open position the roof is folded up in the

cargo area. The roof can be raised or lowered

to facilitate loading and unloading using the

button (see preceding illustration). The move-

ments for loading assistance constitute a small

amount of the normal movement of the roof.

Consequently the messages for roof operation

on the information display also apply to loading

assistance, see page 96.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

107

WARNING

People or objects which prevent the raising and lowering of the roof are at risk of being trapped.

Using loading assistance One press on the button both starts and stops

raising/lowering. It may take several seconds

before the movement starts. If a signal sounds

when the button is pressed and the roof does

not move, read the message on the information

display.

1. Press the button to raise the roof.

2. Lift the cargo separator and move it into

the cargo area.

3. When loading is complete, fold down the

cargo separator.

4. Press the button so that the roof is low-

ered.

NOTE

If the battery level is too low then the roof can only be lowered.

Using loading assistance with roof faults If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE

MANUAL is shown on the information display

then the roof can only be lowered.

1. Check that ROOF FAILURE SEE

MANUAL is shown on the display.

2. Keep the button depressed for approx.

5 seconds. Keep the button depressed

while the roof is lowered.

A signal sounds during the whole lowering

operation.

IMPORTANT

The cargo separator should be fully open before opening the roof.

When the roof is raised for loading assis- tance or if the movement is interrupted by pressing in the button twice then the boot lid must not be closed. This could result in damage and malfunction in the system.

Lower the roof to its lowest position, wait a few seconds and then close the boot lid.

Load retaining eyelets

G 02

08 50

There are four or more eyelets for securing

straps or ropes. Straps that are suitable for the

eyelets are supplied by Volvo dealers.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electrical socket in cargo area

G 02

08 56

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket. This socket works regardless of

whether or not the ignition is on.

NOTE

Remember not to use the electrical socket with the engine switched off because of the risk of discharging the car's battery.

Ski hatch

G 02

10 37

There is a hatch behind the centre panel1 in the

rear seat backrest for transporting long, light

objects.

Max. length: 2 m and max. weight: 25 kg. The

ski hatch is opened from two directions, from

the centre panel and from inside the cargo

area.

Open the centre section in the back of

the rear seat Pull the strap in the top of the backrest

centre section to access the hatch.

Close the centre section in the back of

the rear seat 1. Refit the centre section with the lower part

first.

2. Fold in the centre section and press until a

clicking sound is heard.

Hatch in cargo area If the car is equipped with ski bag* then the zip

in the bag must also be opened from the pas-

senger compartment.

Press the buttons in the two holes in the

hatch towards each other and open the

hatch.

Locking the ski hatch Locked with the remote control key, see

page 117.

Secure long loads with the seatbelt Long loads, for example skis, must be secured

with the rear seat's seatbelt.

Wrap the seatbelt one turn around the skis

and lock it in the normal way in the seatbelt

buckle.

If the car is equipped with a ski bag* then the

belt must be threaded through its handle.

1 Emergency puncture repair kit, first aid, plastic cover and towing eye are stored in the centre panel in the rear seat backrest. For cars with spare wheel*, see page 180.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

109

WARNING

Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may other- wise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 112

Privacy locking*..................................................................................... 115

Active locks........................................................................................... 117

Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 118

Battery in remote control key................................................................ 121

Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 122

Alarm*.................................................................................................... 126

05 LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

112

Remote control key

The car is supplied with two remote control

keys.

The remote control keys contain detachable

metal key blades for mechanical locking/

unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.

The key blades' unique code is available at

authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-

ommended for ordering new key blades.

A maximum of six remote control keys/key

blades can be programmed and used for one

single car.

Turn signal indication during locking/ unlocking

When the car is unlocked using the remote

control key or Keyless drive system, two short

flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi-

cate that unlocking was correctly performed.

For locking, the indication takes place with one

long flash and only if all locks have been

locked, after the doors and the boot lid have

been closed.

Personal preferences in the menu system can

be used to the deactivate indication via the

direction indicators. There will then be no visual

indication as to whether the lock status is cor-

rect, see page 72.

Loss of a remote control key

If you lose a remote control key, take the car

and the other remote control keys to a Volvo

workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is

recommended. The code of the missing

remote control key must be erased from the

system as a theft prevention measure.

Immobiliser

The remote control keys are fitted with coded

chips. The code must be accepted by the

reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The car

can only be started if the correct remote control

key with the correct code is used.

Remote control key functions

G 01

94 02

Locking Locks the doors, the boot lid,

the storage compartments in the door pan-

els (lockable as option) as well as the ski

hatch. The remote control key does not

lock the glovebox.

Unlocking Unlocks the doors, the boot

lid, the storage compartments in the door

panels (lockable as option) as well as the

ski hatch. The remote control key does not

unlock the glovebox.

Approach lighting Switches on the light-

ing at a distance and lights up the area

around a car parked in a dark location.

Press the button once to switch on the

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

113

interior lighting, position/parking lamps,

number plate lighting and door mirror

lamps (option). The lighting is switched off

automatically after 30, 60 or 90 seconds.

For information on setting the delay time,

see page 72.

Boot lid - Press the button once to unlock

the boot lid only1.

Panic function Used to attract attention

in an emergency. Press and hold the red

button for at least three seconds or press

it twice within three seconds to activate the

direction indicators and the horn. The func-

tion can be turned off with the same button

once it has been active for at least 5 sec-

onds. Otherwise the function switches off

automatically after 30 seconds.

IMPORTANT

The narrow section of the remote control key is particularly sensitive - this contains the chip. The car cannot be started if the chip is damaged.

Detachable key blade

G 01

94 03

Using the remote control key's detachable key

blade:

the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking is not activated with the remote control key - see the next section and see page 118.

the boot lid can be opened manually if cen- tral locking is not activated with the remote control key, see page 122 and see page 115.

access to the glovebox and cargo area (privacy locking) is blocked, see page 115.

Removing the key blade To remove the key blade from the remote con-

trol key:

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

Pull out the key blade at the same time.

Inserting the key blade Be careful when inserting the key blade into the

remote control key.

1. Hold the remote control key with the nar-

row end pointing down and lower the key

blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in

position. You should hear a "click".

Unlocking doors with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the

remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-

charged, then the driver's door can be

unlocked and opened as follows:

1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door

keyhole.

2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and

open the door.

1 The function unlocks the boot lid it does not open.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

114

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 127.

Locking the glovebox

G 02

00 34

The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked

using the remote control key's detachable key

blade. (For information on the key blade, see

page 113.)

For information on privacy locking, see

page 115

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

The keyhole is horizontal in the locked

position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlocking takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

The remote control key cannot unlock the glovebox without the key blade.

This function is particularly useful for when the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.

.

05 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

G 01

94 16

Central locking's normal active locks with

the remote control key.

Active locks for remote control key with

key blade removed and with activated pri-

vacy locking.

The privacy locking function is intended for

when the car is left for service, with a hotel

parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then

locked and the boot lid and storage compart-

ment (option) locks are disconnected from the

central locking. The cargo area cannot be

opened with either the central locking button in

the front doors or the remote control key.

This means that the remote control key without

key blade can only be used to activate/deacti-

vate the alarm, to open the doors (A) and to

drive the car (B).

The remote control key is handed over without

the detachable key blade which the owner then

keeps.

Activating privacy locking

NOTE

When opening/closing the folding roof there is the option to temporarily access the con- tents in the cargo area.

The folding roof must be closed.

NOTE

The information display will show CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT.

1. Open the boot lid and fold up the cargo

separator; at which operation of the folding

roof is blocked, see page 112.

2. Close the boot lid.

3. Remove the detachable key blade from the

remote control key, see page 113.

05 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

05

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

00 32

4. Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock

and turn the key blade 180 degrees clock-

wise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked

position for privacy locking.

5. Pull out the key blade.

NOTE

Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key - keep it in a safe place.

Following which, the glovebox is locked and

the lockable storage compartments behind the

door panels (D), the ski hatch (E) and the boot

lid (F) can no longer be unlocked with the

remote control key.

Deactivating privacy locking In order to reconnect the lockable storage

compartments to the central locking's auto-

matic system, proceed as follows:

1. Insert the remote control key's detachable

key blade into the glovebox keyhole and

turn 180 degrees anticlockwise.

2. Refit the key blade into the remote control

key, see page 113.

Following which, the glovebox is unlocked and

all central locking functions are controlled by

the remote control key again.

05 Locks and alarm

Active locks

05

117

G 01

94 15

Active locks for remote control key.

Doors

Steering lock

Ski hatch

Boot lid

Active locks for remote control key with

lockable storage compartments.

Doors

Steering lock

Storage compartments in door panels

Ski hatch

Boot lid

For descriptions of the different storage areas,

see page 102.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless lock and ignition system

G 01

94 18

The keyless drive system allows the car to be

unlocked, driven and locked without the need

for a key. You simply need to have the remote

control key with you in a pocket or a bag.

The system makes it easier and more conven-

ient to open the car, for example with shopping

bags in one hand and a child in the other. It

saves you having to take out or look for the

remote control key.

The two remote control keys incorporate the

keyless drive function. You can order addi-

tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys-

tem can handle up to six remote controls.

Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the

car In order to open a door or the boot lid, a remote

control key must be no more than approx.

1.5 m from the car door handle or boot lid.

This means that the person who wishes to

open a door must have the remote control key

with him or her. It is not possible to open a door

if the remote control key is on the other side of

the car.

The grey area in the illustration indicates the

range covered by the system's antennas.

If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless

drive remote control key with them, a warning

message appears on the information display

and a reminder signal sounds. The warning

message disappears when the remote control

key is brought back to the car or when the igni-

tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning is

only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or

II after someone has opened and closed a

door.

The warning message and reminder signal dis-

appear when the remote control key is brought

back to the car after one of the following

actions:

a door has been opened and closed

the ignition dial has been turned to position 0

the READ button has been pressed.

Never leave any remote control key in the

car If a remote control key with keyless drive func-

tion is left in the car, it is made passive when

the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised

entry.

If someone breaks into the car and finds the

remote control key, it can be activated and

used again. It is therefore important to handle

all remote control keys with equal care.

Interference to remote control key

function Electromagnetic screening and fields can inter-

fere with the keyless drive system. To avoid

this: do not place the remote control key near

mobile phones, metallic objects or, for exam-

ple, in a metal briefcase.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use

the remote control key and key blade in the

normal way, see page 112.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

Locking

G 02

00 33

Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.

When the remote control key is within the range

covered by the system's antennas, the doors

and the boot lid are locked as follows:

Push in the lock button on one of the door

handles.

All doors must be closed before the lock button

is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.

When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the

inside of the doors retract.

An LED on the inside of the door in question

illuminates, see page 123.

NOTE

On cars with the keyless drive system and automatic transmission the gear selector must be moved to the P position and the ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other- wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.

Unlocking

When the remote control key is within the range

covered by the system's antennas:

1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han-

dle.

2. Open the boot lid by pressing under the

boot lid opening button and lift the boot lid.

If for some reason the keyless drive function in

the remote control key is not operating, the car

can be unlocked using the remote control key

functions, see page 112.

Power seat remote control key with

memory function If several people with keyless drive remote

control keys get into the car, then the driver's

seat will be adjusted for the person who opens

the door first.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

G 02

02 25

If central locking cannot be activated with the

remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-

charged, then the driver's door can be opened

as follows:

1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out

the plastic cover in the handle by inserting

the key blade in the hole on the bottom of

the cover.

2. Unlock the door using the key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 127.

Antenna location

G 02

00 77

The keyless system has a number of integrated

antennae located around the car:

Rear bumper, inside centre

Cargo area, central and furthest in under

the floor

Door handle, left

Centre console, under the rear section

Door handle, right

Centre console, under the front section

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.

Personal preferences

The Keyless Drive system can have personal

preferences applied, see page 72.

05 Locks and alarm

Battery in remote control key

05

121

Low battery in remote control key

When the battery runs down and full function-

ality cannot be guaranteed, the information

symbol and display show KEY BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE or CAR KEY - CHANGE

BATTERY.

Changing the remote control key battery

G 01

94 06

If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals

from the remote control key at a normal dis-

tance, the battery should be replaced

(type CR 2450, 3 V).

1. Place the remote control key with the key-

pad downward and prize up the cover

using a small screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and

() sides are fitted (there is a diagram under

the cover).

4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid

touching the battery and its terminals with

your fingers.

5. Refit the cover and press it in.

Dispose of the old battery in an environmen-

tally-responsible manner.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Locking/unlocking the car from outside

For cars with the Keyless system, see

page 118.

Unlocking Using the remote control key's unlock button

the car can be unlocked in two different ways

(select in personal settings, see page 72):

One press unlocks the doors and the boot lid

One press unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the boot lid.

Locking The remote control key lock button locks the

doors and the boot lid at the same time - the

doors' lock button and door handles on the

inside are disengaged*.

NOTE

The car can be locked even if the boot lid is open * - when the boot lid is then closed there is a risk that the keys will be locked in*.

WARNING

Be aware that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the outside with the remote control key. You cannot then leave the car using any of the controls inside the car.

Rapid closing Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) on the

remote control key's lock button to close all

windows at the same time.

Different personal settings can be made, see

page 72.

Boot lid

Unlocking Unlocking boot lid only:

Press the remote control key's button to

unlock the boot lid.

Locking If the doors are locked when the boot lid is

closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the

remote control key's lock button or from inside

to lock both doors and the boot lid.

Opening the boot lid mechanically

G 01

63 34

If the car's electrical systems are temporarily

out of order then the boot lid can be opened

mechanically with the remote control key's

detachable key blade. For information on

removing the key blade, see page 113.

1. Fold forward the left-hand seat's backrest to access the keyhole down at the floor.

2. Fold up the tab that covers the keyhole.

3. Insert the key blade and turn it 110 degrees clockwise.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

123

IMPORTANT

The roof must be fully closed or fully open before mechanical opening can be used for the boot lid.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened

within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked

again automatically (does not apply to locking

from inside). This function reduces the risk of

the car being left unlocked unintentionally. (For

cars with alarms, see page 127.)

Locking/unlocking the car from inside

G 02

08 65

The doors and the boot lid can be locked or

unlocked simultaneously using the central

locking button on either front door.

Unlocking Press the upper section of the central lock-

ing button .

A door cannot be unlocked by pulling up its

lock button.

Locking Press the lower section of the central lock-

ing button .

Opening the doors When the doors are locked from the inside:

Pull the handle twice to unlock and open

the door.

Lock indicator

G 02

08 67

A light on the inside of the door in question illu-

minates for approx. 5 minutes after the car has

been locked with the remote control key's lock

button, or with the Keyless drive system when

the engine is switched off, see page 118.

When the car is locked from the inside the

LEDs acknowledge the locking with one long

flash. Unlocking from the inside is acknowl-

edged by 2 short flashes.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Automatic locking

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the

doors and boot lid are locked automatically.

When the function is activated and the doors

have been locked they can be opened in two

ways:

Pull one of the door handles twice

Press the upper section of the central lock-

ing button and pull the door handle.

The function can be activated/deactivated by

means of personal preferences, see page 72.

Deadlocks*

When deadlocked, the doors cannot be

opened from the inside if they are locked with

the remote control key.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote

control key and are set after a 25 second delay

after the doors are locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock

state with the remote control key. The driver's

door can also be unlocked with the detachable

key blade.

Temporary deactivation

A

D

B

C

E

G 02

63 07

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

If someone is going to stay in the car but the

doors must be locked from the outside, then

the deadlocks function can be temporarily

switched off.

This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the

menu system, see page 72).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once: The instrument

panel display shows the message

Reduced guard - See manual and the

deadlocks function is switched off when

the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is

turned to position 0 the audio system dis-

play shows the message Press ENTER to

reduce guard until engine is started.

EXIT to cancel - select one of the options:

If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car.

If the car is equipped with an alarm with move-

ment and tilt detectors* then these are

switched off at the same time, see page 128.

The next time the remote control key is turned

to key position II the system is reset to zero and

the instrument panel display shows the mes-

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125

sage Full guard at which the deadlocks func-

tion and the alarm's movement and tilt detec-

tors* are re-engaged.

or

If the locking system shall not be changed: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an alarm:

Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alarm system

When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-

tors all alarm inputs.

The alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or boot lid is opened

a non-approved key is used in the ignition or if an attempt is made to force the lock

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector)

the battery's cable is disconnected

anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

NOTE

When the roof is closed, the alarm functions in the same way as when it is open, i.e. movement detected in the passenger com- partment triggers an alarm.

NOTE

One of the detectors for the alarm is located under the cup holder in the centre console. This detector is sensitive for metals.

Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the centre console's cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm.

Alarm indicator

G 02

02 27

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates

the alarm system's status:

LED not lit the alarm is not armed.

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until key position II is activated the alarm has been triggered.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message

appears on the display. At which point you

should contact a workshop - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.

Arming the alarm

Press the remote control key lock button.

A long flash from the car's direction indi-

cators confirms that the alarm is armed

and that the doors are locked.

IMPORTANT

The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Disarming the alarm

Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc-

tion indicators confirm that the alarm is

disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.

Automatic re-arming of the alarm

This function prevents you accidentally leaving

the car without the alarm on.

If none of the doors or the tailgate are opened

within two minutes of disarming the alarm (and

the car has been unlocked with the remote

control key), the alarm is automatically

rearmed. The car is locked at the same time.

Deactivating a triggered alarm

Press the unlock button on the remote

control key or insert the key in the ignition

switch.

Confirmation is given by two short flashes from

the direction indicators.

Alarm signals

When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-

pens:

A siren sounds for less than 25 seconds. The siren has its own battery which is used if the car battery has insufficient charge or is disconnected.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is deactivated.

Remote control key not working

G 01

94 20

If for some reason the remote control key is not

working, the alarm can still be switched off and

the car started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.

The alarm is triggered and the siren

sounds.

2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First

remove the knob by pressing in the

catch (1) and pulling out (2).

3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The

alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote

control key is turned to key position II.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Reduced alarm level

A

D

B

C

E G

02 63

07

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -

for example when leaving a dog in the car or

during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt

detectors can be temporarily switched off.

This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the

menu system, see page 72).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once: The instrument

panel display shows the message

Reduced guard - See manual and the

movement and tilt detectors are switched

off when the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is

turned to position 0 the audio system dis-

play shows the message Press ENTER to

reduce guard until engine is started.

EXIT to cancel - select one of the options:

If the movement and tilt detectors shall be deactivated: Press ENTER and lock the car.

If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-

tion then it is switched off at the same time, see

page 124.

The next time the remote control key is turned

to key position II the system is reset to zero and

the instrument panel display shows the mes-

sage Full guard at which the movement and

tilt detectors and the deadlocks function are re-

engaged.

or

If the detectors shall not be switched off: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.

Testing the alarm system

Testing the movement detector in the

passenger compartment 1. Open all the windows.

2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is

confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Test the movement detector in the pas-

senger compartment, such as by lifting out

a bag from a seat. A siren should sound

and all direction indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for doors 1. Arm the alarm.

2. Please wait 30 seconds.

3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

4. Open one of the doors. A siren should

sound and all direction indicators should

flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement

detector.

2. Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock

the doors with the button on the remote

control key.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the

dashboard. A siren should sound and all

direction indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control key.

G 02

09 12

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 132

Refuelling.............................................................................................. 134

Starting the engine................................................................................ 136

Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 138

Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 139

Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 141

Brake system........................................................................................ 145

DSTC Stability and traction control system*...................................... 147

Park Assist*........................................................................................... 149

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 151

Towing and recovery............................................................................. 155

Start assistance.................................................................................... 158

Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 159

Towing equipment*............................................................................... 161

Detachable towbar*.............................................................................. 163

Loading................................................................................................. 167

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 168

06 STARTING AND DRIVING

06 Starting and driving

General

06

132

Economical driving

Driving economically means driving smoothly

while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving

style and speed to the prevailing conditions.

For more advice on reducing environmental

impact. see page 12.

Get the engine warmed up as soon as pos- sible.

Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light loads as soon as it is possible.

A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Avoid braking too hard.

Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the car.

Do not use winter tyres when the roads are dry.

Remove load carriers when they are not being used.

Avoid driving with open windows.

Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under

controlled conditions to learn how the car

reacts.

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and

cooling system will overheat.

Avoid overheating the cooling system

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille if driving in extreme high tem- peratures.

Avoid overheating the engine Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm

(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) if driving with a

trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem-

perature could then become too high.

Open boot lid

Avoid driving with the boot lid open. If it is nec-

essary to drive with the tailgate open for a short

distance:

1. Close all windows.

2. Set the air distribution to the windscreen

and floor and run the fan at high speed.

WARNING

Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Driving in water

The car can be driven through water at a maxi-

mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of

10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised

when passing through flowing water.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.

06 Starting and driving

General

06

133

When driving in water, maintain a low speed

and do not stop the car. When the water has

been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly

and check that full brake function is achieved.

Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake

function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric

engine block heater and trailer coupling after

driving in water and mud.

IMPORTANT

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Tow the car from the water.

Do not overload the battery

The electrical functions in the car load the bat-

tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the

remote control key in position II when the

engine is switched off. Use key position I

instead, as less power is consumed.

Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area

supplies power even when the remote control

key has been removed from the ignition switch.

Examples of functions that use a lot of power:

ventilation fan

windscreen wipers

audio equipment (high volume)

parking lights.

Also, be aware of different accessories that

load the electrical system. Do not use functions

which use a lot of power when the engine is

switched off.

If the battery voltage is low, a message appears

on the display. The energy-saving function

shuts down certain functions or reduces the

load on the battery by, for example, slowing the

ventilation fan and switching off the audio sys-

tem.

Charge the battery by starting the engine.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

134

Opening the fuel filler flap

G 02

07 99

Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuelling!

Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the

lighting panel, see page 54. The engine must

be switched off before the flap can be opened.

The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.

Closing Push in the flap until you hear a click.

Fuel cap 1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis-

tance is felt.

2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a

stop.

3. Take out the cap.

4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel

filler flap.

NOTE

Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling. Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.

Opening from the cargo area

G 02

09 51

Manual opening of the fuel filler flap is easier

when the roof is closed, and is used when it is

not possible to open it from the passenger

compartment.

1. Remove the cover over the lamp housing

on the right-hand side of the cargo area.

2. Pull the cord hanging on the hook.

3. When the fuel filler flap has opened, refit

the cord and cover.

Filling up with fuel

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump

nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Fuel of a lower quality than that specified

should not be used as engine power and fuel

consumption can be negatively affected, see

page 272.

WARNING

Fuel which spills on to the ground can be ignited by the exhaust fumes.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

135

Petrol

IMPORTANT

Do not add cleaning additives to the petrol, unless recommended by Volvo.

For more information on petrol, see

page 272.

Diesel At low temperatures (5 C to 40 C), a paraf-

fin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which

can lead to ignition problems. For more infor-

mation, see page 273.

IMPORTANT

Use special winter grade fuel during cold months.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

06

136

Before starting the engine

Apply the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector in position P or N.

Manual gearbox Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch

pedal fully depressed. This is particularly

important in very cold conditions.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossi- ble to steer the car.

The remote control key must be in key posi- tion II when the car is being towed.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Starting the engine

Petrol Turn the remote control key to key position

III. If the engine does not start within

510 seconds, release the key and try

again.

Diesel 1. Turn the remote control key to key position

II.

> An indicator symbol in the combined

instrument panel shows that engine pre-

heating is underway, see page 47.

2. Turn the ignition key to position III when

the indicator symbol goes out.

Autostart (5-cylinder) With the autostart function, there is no need to

hold the remote control key (or ignition dial on

cars with Keyless Drive, see page 118) in key

position III until the engine has started.

Turn the ignition key to the start position III and

just release it - the starter motor then works

automatically until the engine has started.

NOTE

If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold without waiting for engine preheating, then the automatic start sequence can be delayed for a couple of seconds.

Key positions

0 Locked position The steering lock is activated

when the remote control key

is removed from the ignition

switch.

I Radio position Certain electrical compo-

nents can be switched on.

The engine's electrical sys-

tem is not activated.

II Driving position The remote control key's

position when driving. The

car's electrical system is

energised.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

06

137

III Start position The starter motor is engaged.

When the remote control key

is released it springs back

automatically to the driving

position, once the engine has

started.

A ticking sound may be heard if the key is

between positions. Turn the remote control key

to position II and back to eliminate the sound.

When the steering lock is activated If the front wheels are positioned so that there

is tension in the steering lock, a warning mes-

sage may be shown on the information display

and the car prohibited from starting.

1. Remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch and turn the steering wheel

so that the tension is released.

2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.

Reinsert the key and make a new attempt

to start the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock would be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.

Make sure the steering lock is activated when

the car is left to reduce the risk of theft.

Remote control keys and electronic immobiliser

The remote control key must not hang with

other keys or metal objects on the same key

ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti-

vated accidentally.

06 Starting and driving

Keyless drive*

06

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 01

94 10

The keyless drive system allows the car to be

unlocked, driven and locked without the need

for a key, see page 118.

The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the

same way as the remote control key. One pre-

condition for starting the car is that the car's

remote control key is located inside the pas-

senger compartment or the cargo area.

Starting the car

Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual

gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto-

matic gearbox).

Petrol engine Press in and turn the ignition dial to key

position III.

Diesel engine 1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II

and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in

the combined instrument panel goes out,

see page 47.

2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to

position III.

Starting with the remote control key

G 01

94 20

If the remote control key's battery is dis-

charged then the Keyless Drive function does

not work. In which case, start the car by using

the remote control key as ignition dial.

1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.

2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition

switch.

3. Insert the remote control key into the igni-

tion switch and start in the same way as

with the ignition dial.

06 Starting and driving

Manual gearbox

06

139

Gear positions - five-speed

G 01

82 56

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed

G 01

82 57

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

To engage reverse gear, the gear lever must first be put in position N. Reverse gear cannot therefore be engaged directly from fifth gear due to the reverse gear inhibitor.

Gear positions - six-speed (petrol)

G 01

82 58

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

It may be difficult to find the positions for fifth

and sixth gear when the car is stationary as the

reverse gear inhibitor (which blocks sideways

movement towards reverse) is then not acti-

vated.

06 Starting and driving

Manual gearbox

06

140

Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed

(petrol)

G 01

82 59

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

NOTE

Reverse gear is electronically blocked if the car is travelling faster than approx. 20 km/h.

Gear positions - six-speed (diesel)

G 01

82 61

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed

(diesel)

G 01

82 62

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

Engage reverse gear by pressing down the gear lever and moving it to the left.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

141

Geartronic automatic gear positions

G 01

82 64

D left-hand position: Automatic gear

changing.

M right-hand position: Manual gear chang-

ing.

P Parking position Select position P when you wish to start the

engine or park the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed to move the gear lever from the P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when

the P position is engaged. Always apply the

parking brake when parking the car.

R Reverse The car must be stationary when position R is

selected.

N Neutral No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started. Apply the parking brake when the car

is stationary with the gear selector in posi-

tion N.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed to move the gear selector from the N position if the car has been stationary for more than 3 seconds.

D Drive D is the normal driving position. The car auto-

matically shifts up and down depending on the

level of acceleration and speed. The car must

be stationary when the gear selector is moved

to position D from position R.

Geartronic manual gear positions

The driver can also change gear manually

using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The

car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal

is released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving

the lever from position D to the right-hand end

position at M. The information display shifts the

indication from D to one of the figures 16,

depending which gear is engaged just then,

see page 45.

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position at M.

Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release the lever.

The manual gearshift mode M can be selected

at any time while driving.

To return to automatic driving mode: move the

lever to the left-hand end position at D.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the

driver allows the speed to decrease lower than

a level suitable for the selected gear, in order

to avoid jerking and stalling.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the

way to the floor (beyond the position normally

regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

142

immediately engaged. This is known as kick-

down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-

down position, the gearbox automatically

changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-

tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox

control program has a protective downshift

inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-

tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-

down which would result in an engine speed

high enough to damage the engine. Nothing

happens if the driver still tries to shift down in

this way at high engine speed the original

gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can

change one or more gears at a time depending

on engine speed. The car changes up when the

engine reaches its maximum speed in order to

prevent damage to the engine.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 02

02 37

The gear selector can be moved forward and

back freely between N and D. Other positions

are locked with a latch that is released with the

inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever

can be moved forwards or backwards between

P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

Cars with an automatic gearbox have special

safety systems:

Keylock To remove the remote control key, the gear

selector must be in the P position. The key is

locked in all other positions.

Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:

Hold your foot on the brake pedal when

moving the gear selector to another posi-

tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking

position (P position) To be able to move the gear selector from

the P position to other gear positions, the igni-

tion key must be in position II and the brake

pedal must be depressed.

Shiftlock Neutral (N position) If the gear selector is in the N position and the

car has been stationary for at least three sec-

onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-

ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N

position.

To be able to move the gear selector from the

N position to another gear position, the brake

pedal must be depressed and the ignition key

must be in position II.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

143

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor

G 01

82 63

In certain cases, it may be necessary to move

the car when it is not driveable, for example if

the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move

the car:

1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on

the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear

edge.

2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote

control key.

3. Hold the key blade down and at the same

time move the gear lever out of the P posi-

tion.

Cold start

When starting in low temperatures, the gear

changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due

to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-

tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-

box shifts up later than normal when the engine

is started at low temperatures.

NOTE

Depending on the engine temperature when the engine is started, the idle speed after a cold start may be higher than normal for certain engine types.

Text message and action

In some situations the display can show a mes-

sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi-

nated.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

144

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action

TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO

HOLD

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-

stant engine speed.

Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station-

ary using the foot brakeA.

TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi-

ately in a safe manner.

TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling:

Run the engine at idling speed with the gear

lever in the N or P position until the mes-

sage clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an increased

degree of seriousness should the gearbox

become too hot. In parallel with the display text

the driver is also advised that the car's elec-

tronics are temporarily changing the driving

characteristics. Follow the instructions on the

information display where appropriate.

NOTE

The table's examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten- tionally to prevent damage to one of the car's components.

For more possible display messages with their

respective proposals for solutions concerning

automatic transmission, see page 50.

A display text clears automatically after the

action has been carried out or after one press

on the indicator stalk READ button.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

145

Brake servo

If the car is rolling or is being towed with the

engine turned off, the brake pedal must be

pressed about five times harder than when the

engine is running. If the brake pedal is

depressed when the engine is started, you will

feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to

the brake servo becoming active. This may be

more noticeable if the car has Emergency

Brake Assistance (EBA).

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

NOTE

If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.

Brake circuits

This symbol illuminates if a brake

circuit is not working.

If a fault should occur in one of the

circuits, it is still possible to brake

the car. The brake pedal will travel further and

may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure

on the pedal is needed to produce the normal

braking effect.

Dampness can affect braking

characteristics Brake components become wet when the car

is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water

or when the car is washed. This may alter brake

pad friction characteristics so that there is a

delay before braking effect is noticed.

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time

if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy

snow, as well as after setting off in very damp

or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads

and dries off any water. This precaution is also

recommended before parking the car for a long

period in such weather conditions.

If the brakes are used heavily

When driving in the Alps or other roads with

similar characteristics, the car's brakes are

heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not

being depressed especially hard.

Because speed is often low, the brakes are not

cooled as effectively as when driving on flat

roads at higher speed.

So as not to overload the brakes, shift down

when driving downhill instead of using the foot

brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as

you would use driving uphill. This uses engine

braking more efficiently so the foot brake is

only required for brief periods.

Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an

additional load on the car's brakes.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

The anti-lock braking system

(ABS) prevents the wheels from

locking up during braking.

This means the ability to steer is

maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a

hazard for example.

After the engine has been started, the ABS will

perform a brief self-test at a speed of

about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as

pulses in the brake pedal.

To get the most out of the ABS:

1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.

Pulses will be felt.

2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do

not release the pressure on the pedal.

Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf-

fic-free area and in different weather condi-

tions.

The ABS symbol illuminates for two seconds if

there was a fault in the ABS system when the

engine was last running.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

146

Emergency Brake Assistance EBA

(Emergency Brake Assistance) For sudden

braking, full-strength braking is provided

instantaneously. The EBA function senses

when heavy braking is underway by registering

how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.

Continue braking without easing off on the

brake pedal. The function is suspended when

the pressure on the brake pedal eases. This

function is always active. It cannot be disen-

gaged.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

06 Starting and driving

DSTC Stability and traction control system*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

General

The stability and traction control system, STC/

DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control)

helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves

the car's traction.

A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking

or acceleration when the system is in action.

The car may accelerate slower than expected

when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force

of the wheels individually in order to stabilise

the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from

spinning against the road surface during accel-

eration.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans-

fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-

ning to the one that is not.

Reduced operation

G 02

90 57

Thumbwheel1

RESET button1

The stability system is activated automatically

each time the car is started.

System operation during skidding and accel-

eration can be partially deactivated. Operation

during skidding is then delayed and so allows

more skidding which provides greater freedom

for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or

sand is improved at the same time as acceler-

ation is no longer limited.

Operation Turn thumbwheel until the STC/DSTC

menu is shown.

DSTC ON means that the system function

is unchanged.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that

system operation is reduced.

Press and hold the RESET button until the

STC/DSTC menu is changed.

At the same time the symbol illumi-

nates as a reminder that the system has

been reduced.

The system remains reduced until the

engine is next started.

WARNING

Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.

NOTE

DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on

the display and the symbol illuminates each time the engine is started.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

06 Starting and driving

DSTC Stability and traction control system*

06

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Messages on the information display

TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF means that the system has been tempo-

rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera-

ture. The function is reactivated automatically

when the brakes have cooled.

ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system

disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

If the message remains when the engine is

restarted, drive to a workshop - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

DSTC system

Information

If the symbols and are displayed at the

same time: Read the message on the informa-

tion display.

If the symbol appears alone then it may

appear as follows:

Flashing light means that the STC/DSTC system is now being activated.

Constant glow for two seconds means system check when the engine is started.

Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means that there is a fault in the STC/DSTC system.

Constant glow after deactivation reminds that the STC/DSTC system has been reduced.

06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

General information on parking assistance

Parking assistance front and rear.

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.

A signal indicates the distance to a detected

obstacle.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren or animals near the car.

Variants Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only.

Both front and rear.

Function The frequency of the signal increases the

shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of

or behind the car. If the volume of another

audio source from the audio system is high,

then this is automatically lowered.

The tone becomes constant at a distance of

about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this

distance both behind and in front of the car, the

signal alternates between left and right-hand

speakers.

Rear parking assistance only

The system is automatically engaged when the

car is started.

Rear parking assistance is activated when

reverse gear is engaged and the message Park

Assist active, Exit to deactivate is shown on

the audio system display.

If the system is switched off, the display shows

Park Assist deactivated Enter to activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change

the settings, see page 72.

The distance covered behind the car is

about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the

rear loudspeakers.

Limitations The system must be deactivated when revers-

ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar

or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier

would trigger the sensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

Parking assistance both front and rear

G 01

83 89

Button for Off/On (here rear button).

The system is automatically engaged when the

car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is

06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

06

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

illuminated. If parking assistance is switched

off with the button, the lamp goes out.

Front Front parking assistance is active at speeds

below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at

higher speeds. When the speed is below

10 km/h the system is reactivated.

The distance covered to the front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in

front comes from the front loudspeakers.

Limitations Front parking assistance cannot be combined

with extra lights because the sensors are affec-

ted by the extra lights.

Rear Rear parking assistance is activated when

reverse gear is engaged.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is

about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles

behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.

Limitations See the previous section Rear parking assis-

tance only.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illumi-

nates with constant glow and the

display shows PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED then park-

ing assistance is disengaged. For

attention, contact a workshop - an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Cleaning the sensors

G 02

09 52

Parking assistance sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

General

G 02

02 95

Rearview mirror with BLIS system.

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

BLIS is an information system that under cer-

tain conditions can help to draw the driver's

attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-

tion in the so-called "blind spot".

The system is designed to work most effec-

tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane

highways.

BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam-

eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.

When a camera has detected a vehicle inside

the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-

minates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault

arises in the system. If for example the sys-

tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS

indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown

in the information display. In such cases, check

and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system

can be switched off temporarily by pressing the

BLIS button, see page 152.

Blind spots

A

B

G 02

02 96

A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven at

a speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking The system is designed to react if you overtake

another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h

faster than the other vehicle.

The system is designed to react if you are over-

taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h

faster than your vehicle.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of

the surrounding vehicles. The system is

designed to detect motor vehicles such as

cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with

headlamps that are switched off are not

detected by the system. This means for exam-

ple that the system does not react to a trailer

without headlamps which is towed behind a

car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds.

The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by intensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked.

In both cases a message is shown on the information display.

When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily reduced and a text message is shown, see page 153.

If the message disappears automatically then BLIS has returned to normal function- ality.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.

Activating/deactivating

G 01

83 89

Button for Off/On (here front button).

BLIS is activated when the engine is started.

The indicator lamps in the door panels flash

three times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated by

pressing the BLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button

goes out and a text message is shown on the

dashboard display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the button

illuminates, a new text message is shown on

the display and the indicator lamps in the door

panels flash three times. Press the READ but-

ton to clear the text message. For more infor-

mation on messages, see page 50.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

BLIS system message

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIS ON BLIS system on.

BLIS REDUCED

FUNCTION

The BLIS camera is

disrupted by fog or

strong sunlight, for

example, shining

directly into the

camera.

The camera resets

itself when the envi-

ronment has

returned to normal.

BLIS CAMERA

BLOCKED

One or both cam-

eras blocked.

Clean the lenses.

BLIS SERVICE

REQUIRED

Blind spot system

disengaged.

Contact with an

authorised Volvo

workshop is recom-

mended.

BLIS OFF BLIS system off.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-

era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be

cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.

Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not

scratched.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may

illuminate despite there being no other vehicle

within the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS SERVICE REQUIRED.

Here are several examples of situations where

the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if

there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 01

81 77

Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.

Low sun in the camera.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

155

Start assistance

Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged

and the engine does not start. Do not tow the

car to bump start it, see page 158.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.

Towing

Find out the highest legal speed for towing

before towing the car.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II

and unlock the steering lock so that the car

can be steered, see page 137.

2. The ignition key must remain in position II

while the car is being towed.

3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently

depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent

jerks.

WARNING

The steering lock remains in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering lock must be unlocked before tow- ing.

The remote control key must be in position II. Never remove the key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.

NOTE

If the car is de-energised then the steering lock must be unlocked using a donor bat- tery before towing can be started.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release

the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and

release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.

Model 2.0 2.0 with automatic gearbox should not be

towed. As the transmission fluid cannot be

maintained at the correct operating tempera-

ture by the engine-driven circulation pump the

risk of damage to the gearbox is great.

However, the car can be towed for a short dis-

tance at low speed to move it from a dangerous

position - not further than 30 km and not faster

than 30 km/h.

IMPORTANT

Towing at temperatures below freezing point is strongly advised against.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

156

Towing eye

Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed

on the road. The towing eye is attached in the

recess on the right-hand side of the front or

rear bumper.

Fitting the towing eye Take out the towing eye (1) that is stored in

the bag behind the ski hatch or together

with the spare wheel.

Release the cover on the bumper by press-

ing on the marking on the lower edge of the

cover.

Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up

to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to

tighten the towing eye.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Refit the cover on the bumper.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads, not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store the towbar's towball in the car, see page 161.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

157

Recovery

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The car must always be towed with the wheels

rolling forward.

IMPORTANT

Cars with automatic gearbox must only be towed with drive wheels raised from the road.

06 Starting and driving

Start assistance

06

158

Starting with a donor battery

G 02

02 98

If the battery in the car has become flat, you

can "borrow" electric current from either a sep-

arate battery or from another car. Always make

sure the crocodile clips on the jump leads are

attached securely to eliminate sparks during

the start attempt.

When jump starting the car, the following steps

are recommended to avoid risk of explosion:

1. Turn the remote control key to key position

0.

2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.

3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch

off the engine in the other car and ensure

that the cars do not touch one another.

4. Connect the red jump lead between the

positive terminal on the donor battery (1+)

and the positive terminal in your car (2+).

5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to

the donor battery's negative terminal (3-).

6. Connect the other end of the black jump

lead to the earthing point (4) by the left-

hand strut tower.

7. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the

engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly

higher than idle 1500 rpm.

8. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-

tery.

9. Remove the jump leads, first the black and

then the red.

Make sure that none of the clamps on the

black jump lead comes into contact with

the battery's positive terminal or the clamp

connected to the red jump lead.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water.

If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

159

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The

total of the weight of the passengers and all

accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's

payload by a corresponding weight. For more

detailed information on weights, see

page 262.

If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised

Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with

the necessary equipment for driving with a

trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure decal location, see page 176.

Clean the towing bracket regularly and

grease the towball1.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Please wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

The engine and gearbox can overheat if the car is driven with a heavy load in hot weather. If the temperature gauge for the engine's cooling system goes into the red zone, stop and let the engine idle for a few minutes. The automatic gearbox responds through a built-in protection system. See the message on the information display. If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

In the interests of safety, speed should be restricted to 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Trailer weights

Information on permitted trailer weights, see

page 262.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

Automatic gearbox, driving with a trailer

Parking on a hill 1. Apply the parking brake (handbrake).

2. Move the gear selector to parking position

P.

1 Does not apply to the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

160

Starting on a hill 1. Move the gear selector to driving posi-

tion D.

2. Release the parking brake (handbrake).

Steep inclines

Select an appropriate manual gear position when climbing steep inclines or at low speeds. This prevents the gearbox from changing up and keeps the gearbox oil cooler.

Do not use a higher manual gear than the engine can "handle". It is not always eco- nomical to drive in high gears.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

Diesel engine with manual gearbox, driving with a trailer

If the car is driven with a major load in a hot

climate, the engine cooling fan can be replaced

with one of a greater capacity than the stand-

ard model. Check with your nearest Volvo

dealer regarding the options for your car.

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

Towbar

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,

the towball mounting instructions must be fol-

lowed carefully, see page 163.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.

The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks

The towball section's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.

Storing the towball section

G 03

11 13

Towball section storage location.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

Trailer cable

G 01

45 89

An adapter is required if the car's towing

bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has

7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved

by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag

on the ground.

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Specifications

G 01

03 93 G

01 03

91

G 01

03 92

Dimensions for mounting points (mm)

A B C D E F G H I J K

Fixed or detachable towbar standard 1172 89 964 482 40 141 550 150 113 100 140

1 Side member

2 Ball centre

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

Fitting the towball

G 01

73 17

1. Remove the protective cover by first press-

ing in the catch and then pulling the

cover straight back .

G 02

03 01

2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the

unlocked position by turning the key clock-

wise.

G 02

03 02

3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows

red. If the window does not show red,

press in and turn the locking wheel anti-

clockwise until you hear a click.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

03 04

4. Insert the towball section until your hear a

click.

G 02

03 06

5. Check that the indicator window shows

green.

G 02

03 07

6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-

tion. Remove the key from the lock.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

G 02

03 09

7. Check that the towball section is secure by

pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.

G 02

03 10

8. Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.

Removing the towball

G 02

03 01

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

03 12

2. Push in the locking wheel and turn it

anticlockwise until you hear a click.

G 02

03 14

3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it

comes to a stop. Hold it in this position

while pulling the towball rearward and

upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 161.

G 01

73 18

4. Push on the protective cover.

06 Starting and driving

Loading

06

167

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The

total of the weight of the passengers and all

accessories reduces the car's payload by a

corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-

mation on weights, see page 262.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

Loading the cargo area

Stop the engine and apply the parking brake

when loading or unloading long objects. The

gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out

of position by long loads, which could set the

car in motion.

Place the load firmly against the backrest in

front.

Put wide loads in the centre.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

Never load cargo above the backrest.

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.

Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

168

Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic

G 02

03 17

Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.

Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a

control in each headlamp housing to avoid

dazzling oncoming motorists.

The correct pattern will also better illuminate

the verge.

Halogen headlamps

G 02

14 21

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

Headlamps with Xenon lights

G 02

14 22

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

WARNING

On cars with Dual Xenon headlamps, Dual Xenon lamp replacement must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The headlamps must be handled with extreme caution due to the Dual Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.

06 Starting and driving

06

169

G 02

09 18

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 172

Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 176

Warning triangle* and spare wheel* ..................................................... 179

Changing wheels................................................................................... 182

Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 184

07 WHEELS AND TYRES

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

172

Driving characteristics and tyres

The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-

racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre

pressure and speed rating are important for

how the car performs.

When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the

same type and dimensions, and preferably also

the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures

specified on the tyre pressure label, see

page 176.

Designation of dimensions

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.

Example: 205/55R16 91 W.

205 Section width (mm)

55 Ratio between section height and

width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted

speed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings

The car is approved as a whole, which means

that dimensions and speed ratings must not

differ from those specified on the vehicle reg-

istration document. The only exception to

these conditions is winter tyres (both those

with metal studs and those without). If such a

tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster

than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,

class Q can be driven at a maximum of

160 km/h).

Remember that traffic regulations determine

how fast a car can be driven, not the speed

class of the tyres.

Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a

few years they begin to

harden at the same time as

the friction capacity/charac-

teristics gradually deteriorate.

For this reason, aim to get as

fresh tyres as possible when

you replace them. This is especially important

with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits

in the sequence mean the week and year of

manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking

(Department of Transportation), and this is sta-

ted with four digits, for example 1502. The tyre

in the illustration was manufactured in week 15

of 2002.

Tyre age All tyres older than six years should be checked

by an expert even if they seem undamaged.

The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-

pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.

The function can therefore be affected due to

the tyre's constituent materials being broken

down. In such a case the tyre should then not

be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter

tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples

of external signs which indicate that the tyre is

unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

The age of the tyre can be determined by the

DOT marking, see previous illustration.

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

173

More even wear and maintenance

G 02

03 23

Tread wear indicators.

The correct tyre pressure results in more even

wear, see page 176. Driving style, tyre pres-

sure, climate and road condition affect how

quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-

ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear

patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can

be switched with each other. A suitable dis-

tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km

and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop for checking if you are uncertain

about tread depth.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging

up, and not standing up.

Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless

bands across the width of the tread. On the

side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear

Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down

to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height

with the tread wear indicators. Change to new

tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poor

grip in rain and snow.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific

winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are

dependent on engine variant. When driving on

winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four

wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for

500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly

into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-

cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-

peratures place considerably higher demands

on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore

recommended not to drive on winter tyres that

have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front

wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive

cars.

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow

chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this

wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space

between the brake discs and the wheels is too

small.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed specifically for the car model, and tyre and wheel rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recom- mends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop.

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rims and wheel nuts

G 02

03 24

Standard wheel nuts.

Bulge acorn wheel nuts.

Only use wheel rims that are tested and

approved by Volvo and which are included in

the Volvo genuine accessories range.

There are two types of wheel nut, depending

on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or

aluminium.

1. Tighten the wheel nuts to 110 Nm.

2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

IMPORTANT

The wheel nuts should be tightened to 110 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Steel rims standard wheel nuts (1) Steel rims are normally mounted with the

standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari-

ety may also be used.

WARNING

Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims. The wheel could come loose.

Aluminium rims bulge acorn wheel nuts

(2) Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with

aluminium rims. These differ markedly from

other nut types as they have a rotating conical

washer.

NOTE

These nuts may also be used with steel rims.

Locking wheel nuts Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-

minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking

wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel

covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-

ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise

the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.

Spare wheel Temporary Spare*

The spare wheel is only intended to be used for

the short time it takes to get the normal wheel

replaced or repaired. Replace the spare wheel

with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The

car's handling may be altered by the use of the

spare wheel.

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare

wheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

175

Summer and winter wheels

G 02

03 25

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

When summer and winter wheels are changed,

see page 182, the wheels should be marked

with which side of the car they were mounted

on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres

with a tread pattern which are designed to only

turn in one direction have the direction of rota-

tion marked with an arrow.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direc-

tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only

be switched between front and rear positions,

never between left and right-hand sides, or

vice versa.

If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's

braking characteristics and capacity to force

rain, snow and slush out of the way are

adversely affected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth should

always be fitted to the rear of the car (to

decrease the risk of skidding).

Volvo recommends that you contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are

uncertain about tread depth.

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

176

Recommended tyre pressure

G 02

09 55

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door

pillar shows which pressures the tyres should

have at different load and speed conditions.

NOTE

Full load in the car equates to the number of seats with seatbelts.

Stated on the label:

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre size

ECO pressure

Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).

Checking the tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

Even after several kilometres of driving, the

tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So

air must not be released if the pressure is

checked when the tyres are warm. While the

pressure must be increased if it is too low.

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-

sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the

car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre

pressure that is too low can also result in the

tyres overheating and disintegrating.

For information on the correct tyre pressure,

refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified

tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold

tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature.)

Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre

pressure for maximum load is recommended

in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road

noise and steering characteristics.

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

177

Tyre pressure table

Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load

Front (kPa) A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pres- sureB

2.4

2.4i

215/55 R16 91W 0-160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

215/50 R17 91W

235/45 R17 94W

235/40 R18 91Y

0-160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

T5

2.0D

215/55 R16 91W 0-160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 260 210 280 260 -

215/50 R17 91W

235/45 R17 94W

235/40 R18 91Y

0-160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

178

Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load

Front (kPa) A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pres- sureB

D5 215/55 R16 91 W 0-160 230 210 250 250 250

160+ 260 210 280 260 -

215/50 R17 91W

235/45 R17 94W

235/40 R18 91Y

0-160 240 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

Spare

wheelC T125/85R16 99M 0-80 420 420 420 420 -

A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. B Fuel-efficient driving.see page 176 C Temporary Spare.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

Warning triangle

G 02

09 56

Follow the regulations in force for the use of a

warning triangle*. Place the warning triangle in

a suitable place with regard to the traffic.

1. Undo the case containing the warning tri- angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take the warning triangle from the case.

2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are

located in the spare wheel well.

Spare wheel* and jack*

G 02

09 59

Location, tools for emergency puncture repair kit.

The car's original jack* The original jack must only be used for chang-

ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be

well greased. The jack* and wheel wrench* are

located in a foam block in the cargo area.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question.

Emergency puncture repair kit For operation and location, see page 184.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel*

07

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Spare wheel and tools

G 02

09 60

Spare wheel and tools.

The spare wheel* is supplied in a tyre bag that

is located in the cargo area's spare wheel well.

In the centre of the tyre is a black foam block

containing jack* and wheel wrench. The ten-

sioning strap for the bag is secured in two lash-

ing eyes on the floor.

1. Undo the two tensioning straps that secure the tyre bag to the floor.

2. Unzip the tyre bag and take out the tools.

3. Lift the spare wheel from the bag.

Place the damaged wheel in the tyre bag and

strap it down with the tensioning straps. Be

sure to follow the instructions on the spare

wheel bag when it is refitted.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

WARNING

The spare wheel bag contains impact pro- tection. The spare wheel must be inside the bag when it is stored in the car. Always fit the bag in the spare wheel well, with the text label upwards and so that the arrow is point- ing forwards in the car.

Tools - returning into place

Tools and jack* must be returned into place in

the correct manner after use.

For cars equipped with spare wheel, the jack must be cranked so that it fits into the spare wheel.

For cars equipped with emergency punc- ture repair kit, the jack must be fully cranked together and returned into the foam block.

IMPORTANT

Tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located in the

cargo area.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Removing wheels

G 02

03 31

Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be

changed at a busy location. Make sure that the

car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question.

1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel

wrench* that are located under the carpet

in the cargo area. If another jack is

selected, see page 199.

G 02

03 32

2. Apply the parking brake and engage first

gear, or position P if the car has an auto-

matic gearbox.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels which will remain on the ground.

Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel

covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the

end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by

hand.

5. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock-

wise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.

6. There are two jacking points on each side

of the car. There is a recess in the plastic

cover at each point. Crank the foot of the

jack down so it is pressed squarely on the

ground. Check that the jack is seated cor-

rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus-

trated, and that the base is located directly

under it.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

183

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the

wheel.

Fitting the wheel

1. Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot

rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is

important that the wheel nuts are tightened

properly. Tighten to 110 Nm. Check the

torque with a torque wrench.

5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency puncture repair, general information

The emergency puncture repair kit is used to

seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust

the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor

and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as

a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle

must be replaced before its expiration date and

after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-

tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited

capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in

the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency

puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,

cracks or similar damage.

12V sockets for the compressor are located by

the centre console in the front, by the rear seat

and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical

socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Overview

G 02

04 00

Decal, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing punctured tyres

G 01

97 23

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture

repair kit.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted

speed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and

start the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is operating. If cracks or uneven- ness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not continue. Contacting an author- ised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not continue. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the

pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum

pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is

3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the

cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit

the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3

km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that

the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure

gauge.

3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-

ficiently sealed. The journey should not be

continued. Contact a tyre centre.

4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,

the tyre must be inflated to the pressure

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

specified on the tyre pressure decal.

Release air using the pressure reducing

valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit.

7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the

nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the

replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.

Advise the workshop that the tyre contains

sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Inflating the tyres

The car's original tyres can be inflated by the

compressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.

Make sure that the switch is in position 0

and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's

12 V sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch

to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on

the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using

the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-

sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

Changing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle before the expiration date

has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-

mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.

G 02

09 20

188

Cleaning................................................................................................ 190

Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 194

Rustproofing......................................................................................... 195

08 CAR CARE

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

190

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use

car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to

corrosion.

IMPORTANT

Avoid rinsing the car with the roof lowered in order to avoid water entering the passen- ger compartment.

Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.

Hose down the underbody thoroughly.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,

as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,

impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Removing bird droppings Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork

as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain

chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork

very quickly. This discoloration can only be

removed by a specialist.

Chromed wheels

IMPORTANT

Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick

way of washing the car, but it can never replace

a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-

matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.

IMPORTANT

The roof must be closed for automatic car washes.

The antenna by the boot lid should be unscrewed before automatic car washing.

IMPORTANT

Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

191

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use

sweeping movements and make sure that the

nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the

surface of the car (the distance applies to all

exterior parts).

IMPORTANT

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then

when driving long distances in rain or slush.

This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the

same thing after starting in very damp or cold

weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo

dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured

plastic parts, rubber and trim components

(such as glossy trim mouldings). When using

such a cleaning agent the instructions must be

followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Electrically operated roof If the roof is wet when opened then water will

run into the passenger compartment. For this

reason, wait until the water has run off before

opening the roof.

Hatch cover The hatch cover, see page 95 is sensitive to

water and should therefore be dried with a

cloth if it becomes wet. Clean with a slightly

dampened rag.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull

or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is

at least one year old. However, the car can be

waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax

the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you

begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt

and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white

spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed

using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-

work.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-

uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the

packaging carefully. Many preparations con-

tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatment is not covered by Volvo warranty.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Water-repellent coating*

Never use products such as car wax,

degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellent

properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage

the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when

removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent

coating.

NOTE

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

Cleaning the interior

Treating stains on fabric upholstery A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning the fab-

ric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair the

fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and

approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex

100 standard.

The leather is refined and processed so that it

retains its natural characteristics. It is given a

protective coating, but regular cleaning is

required in order to maintain both characteris-

tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-

hensive product for the cleaning and treatment

of leather upholstery which, when used in

accordance with the instructions, preserves

the leather's protective coating.

After a period of use the natural appearance of

the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-

ing more or less on the surface texture of the

leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather

and shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends

cleaning and application of the protective

cream once to four times per year (or more if

required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's

Leather care product.

IMPORTANT

Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened

sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular

movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the

stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the

stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and

allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage in

a thin layer of cream with gentle circular

movements on the leather.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

193

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes

before use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-

tection against stains and improved UV pro-

tection.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior

parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.

Never use strong stain removers.

Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special

textile cleaning agent is available from your

Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry

before allowing it to retract.

08 Car care

Touching up paintwork

08

194

Paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car's rust-

proofing and should therefore be checked reg-

ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged

paintwork should be rectified immediately. The

most common types of paintwork damage are

stone chips, scratches, and marks on the

edges of wings and doors.

Colour code

Data plate.

Code for car colour

It is important that the correct colour is used.

For product label location, see page 258.

Stone chips and scratches

G 02

03 45

Before touching up paintwork, the car must be

clean and dry and at a temperature above

15 C.

Materials

Primer in a can

Paint in a can or touch-up pen

Brush

Masking tape.

Minor stone chips and scratches If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare

metal and there is an undamaged colour coat,

you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-

aged area.

If the stone chip has penetrated to the

bare metal 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Then remove the tape to

remove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine

brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a

brush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, but

mask around the damaged area to protect

the undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of lapping paste.

08 Car care

Rustproofing

08

195

Inspection and maintenance

Your car has already received a thorough and

complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of

the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.

The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-

tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-

trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the

members, cavities and closed sections.

Maintain the car's rustproofing.

Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.

Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.

The car's rustproofing does not normally

require treatment for approximately 12 years.

After this period, it should be treated at three-

year intervals. If the car needs further treat-

ment, Volvo recommends that you engage an

authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.

G 02

09 22

196

Volvo service......................................................................................... 198

Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 199

Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 200

Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 202

Wiper blades......................................................................................... 207

Battery................................................................................................... 208

Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 210

Fuses..................................................................................................... 216

09 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service09

198

Volvo service programme

Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly

test driven. It was checked again in accord-

ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations

before it was handed over to you.

To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-

sible, follow the Volvo service programme

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo also recommends that you engage an

authorised Volvo workshop to perform the

service and maintenance work. Volvo work-

shops have the personnel, special tools and

service literature to guarantee the highest qual-

ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Special service measures

Certain service measures which affect the car's

electrical system can only be performed using

electronic equipment specially developed for

your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends

that you always contact an authorised Volvo

workshop before beginning or performing

service work that affects the electrical system.

09 Maintenance and service

Self-maintenance 09

199

Before starting work on the car

Battery Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and tightened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine

is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).

Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-

tery. The battery cables must be disconnected

when charging the battery.

The battery contains acid that is both corrosive

and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the

battery in an environmentally correct manner.

Let your Volvo dealer assist you.

WARNING

High output from the ignition system. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dan- gerous. The ignition must therefore always be switched off for work in the engine com- partment.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.

Raising the car

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack other than one recommended by Volvo is selected, then follow the instructions included with the equipment

If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-

tion the jack against the front edge on the sub-

frame.

Do not damage the splashguard under the

engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so

that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always

use axle stands or similar.

If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop

lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are

fixed under the lifting points on the door sill.

See preceding illustration.

Check regularly

Check the following at regular intervals, for

example, when refuelling:

Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- tures around freezing.

Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

.

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment09

200

Opening the bonnet

G 01

05 99

The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.

1. Pull the handle on the far left under the

instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars

the handle is on the far right.) You will hear

when the catch releases.

2. Insert your hand under the centre of the

front edge of the bonnet and press the

safety catch to the right.

3. Open the bonnet.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Engine compartment

Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)

Coolant expansion tank

Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con-

cealed behind the headlamp)

Engine oil dipstick1

Radiator

Radiator fan

Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand

drive)

Filler opening for engine oil1

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand

drive)

1 The location varies depending on engine alternative

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

201

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Air filter1

1 The location varies depending on engine alternative

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids09

202

Engine compartment decal for oil grade.

G 02

03 41

IMPORTANT

Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see the engine compartment decal. Check the oil level frequently and change the oil regu- larly. The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is

permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-

ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a

higher grade than that specified on the decal,

see page 266.

Checking the engine oil and oil filter

G 02

03 38

Dipstick, petrol engines.

G 02

03 40

Dipstick, diesel engines. (D5, Euro 5 has an elec- tronic dipstick.)

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with

the intervals specified in the Service and War-

ranty Booklet.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

203

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low

oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants

have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp

for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an

oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed

via the warning symbol in the centre of the

instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-

tain models have both variants. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

dealer for further information.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especially

important before the first scheduled oil change.

The Service and Warranty Booklet specifies the

odometer readings for oil changes.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every

2 500 km. The most accurate measurements

are made on a cold engine before starting. The

measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-

diately after the engine is switched off. The

dipstick will indicate that the level is too low

because the oil has not had time to flow down

into the oil sump.

Checking the oil

G 02

03 36

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.

Checking the oil in a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking

the level.

2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The

level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start

by topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until

the oil level is nearer the MAX than the

MIN mark on the dipstick, see page 266

for capacities.

Checking the oil in a warm engine 1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off

the engine and then wait 10-15 minutes to

allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

2. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking

the level.

3. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The

level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by

topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil

level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on

the dipstick, see page 266 for capacities.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

204

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

For engines with electronic dipstick1

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil

level gauge with the thumbwheel when the

engine is switched off, see page 56.

Checking the oil level:

1. Switch the ignition to key position II, see

page 136.

2. Turn the thumbwheel to position "OIL

LEVEL ENGINE".

> The oil level in the engine is then shown.

NOTE

The oil level is only updated by the system during driving. The system cannot detect changes when oil is filled or drained.

If engine oil is filled or drained then the car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level is measured correctly.

Message

OK All normal

PLEASE WAIT System initialised,

shown for

about 2 seconds

OIL LEVEL LOW.

FILL 1 LITRE OIL

Fill with engine oil,

see page 200, chap-

ter "Engine com-

partment".

SERVICE

REQUIRED

Shown when the

system has

detected something

that needs to be rec-

tified in order to ena-

ble the correct infor-

mation regarding oil

volume to be shown

Washer fluid, topping up

G 02

03 35

Location of washer fluid reservoir2.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share

a common reservoir.

For capacities, see the table Fluids on page 270.

Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.

Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.

Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that

the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir

and hoses.

1 Only applies to diesel (D5) with Euro 5. 2 Depending on engine alternative.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

205

NOTE

Mix the washer antifreeze and water before filling the reservoir.

TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up

washer fluid.

Checking and topping up the coolant

G 02

03 34

When topping up the coolant, follow the

instructions on the packaging. It is important

that the mixture of coolant concentrate and

water is correct for the prevailing weather con-

ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk

of freezing increases with both too little and too

much coolant concentrate.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water, see page 270. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant, see page 270.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of dam- age (cracks) to the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding

water quality, see page 270.

Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system is

not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures

could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)

to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when

the level falls to the MIN mark.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

NOTE

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High temperatures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids09

206

Checking and topping up the brake and clutch fluid

G 02

03 33

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-

voir3. The fluid level must be between the

MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at

every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade,

see the table Fluids on page 270.

The fluid should be changed annually on cars

driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent

braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-

cal climates with high humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Checking and topping up the power steering fluid

NOTE

Check the level frequently.

The fluid does not require changing. For

capacities and recommended fluid grade, see

page 266.

If a fault should arise in the power steering sys-

tem or if the car is without power and must be

towed, it can still be steered. However, the

steering will be much heavier than normal and

it will require more effort to turn the steering

wheel.

3 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.

09 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades 09

207

Wiper blades

G 02

03 30

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the other side.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see

page 190.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.

Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen

G 02

03 29

1. Turn up the wiper arm.

2. Press the button located on the wiper

blade mounting and pull straight out (1),

parallel with the wiper arm.

3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a

"click" is heard.

> Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-

led and fold down the wiper arm.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery09

208

Battery care

The service life and function of the battery is

influenced by factors such as the number of

starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-

ditions and climatic conditions.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sul- phuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the

owner's manual.

Store the battery out of

the reach of children.

The battery contains cor-

rosive acid.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

209

Avoid sparks and naked

flames.

Risk of explosion.

Changing the battery

Removing the battery 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the

remote control key.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any

electrical terminals. The car's electrical

system has to store information in the con-

trol modules.

3. Remove the cover.

4. Disconnect the negative battery lead.

5. Disconnect the positive battery lead.

6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using

a screwdriver.

7. Release the clamp securing the battery.

8. Remove the battery.

Fitting the battery 1. Fit the battery into position.

2. Fit the clamp securing the battery.

3. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.

4. Connect the positive lead.

5. Connect the negative lead.

6. Refit the cover over the battery.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

210

General

All bulb specifications are given on page 276.

The following list contains bulbs and point-

source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable

for changing except at a workshop:

General interior lighting in the roof

Reading lamps and glovebox lighting

Direction indicators, door mirror and approach lighting

High-level brake light

Dual Xenon headlamps

WARNING

On cars with Dual Xenon headlamps, Dual Xenon lamp replacement must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The headlamps must be handled with extreme caution due to the Dual Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Changing front bulbs

G 00

73 34

All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are

changed by first removing the lamp housing

from the engine compartment.

Removing the lamp housing 1. Remove the remote control key and turn

the light switch to position 0.

2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.

3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then

forward.

4. Unplug the connector by pressing down

the clip with a thumb while moving out the

connector with the other hand.

4

G 00

76 12

5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a

soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

Fitting the lamp housing 1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp

housing and locking pin. Check that the pin

is correctly inserted.

2. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in and

secured in place before the lighting is switched

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

211

on or the remote control key inserted into the

ignition switch.

Dipped beam

G 02

02 55

Removing the cover and bulb 1. Remove the entire lamp housing.

2. Bend aside the catches and remove the

cover.

3. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.

First, press it to the left to release it, then

out and down.

4. Pull out the bulb.

5. Refit the lamp housing. G

00 73

39

Fitting a new bulb 1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-

tion.

2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly

to the right in order to snap it into position.

3. Press the connector back on.

4. Refit the plastic cover.

5. Refit the lamp housing.

Main beam

G 00

73 38

1. Remove the entire lamp housing.

2. Left-hand headlamp:

turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Right-hand headlamp:

turn the bulb holder clockwise.

3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the

bulb.

4. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted

in one position.

5. Refit the lamp housing.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

212

Position/parking lamps

G 00

73 92

1. Withdraw the bulb holder using pliers. Do

not pull out the bulb holder by pulling the

electrical cable.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Press the bulb holder back on. It can only

be refitted in one position.

Direction indicators

G 00

73 93

1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and

remove it.

2. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,

press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.

3. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into

the lamp housing.

Side marker lamps

G 00

73 94

1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and

withdraw it. Replace the bulb.

2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one

position.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

213

Front fog lamps

G 02

10 46

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote

control key to position 0.

2. Remove the panel from around the lamp

housing.

3. Remove the two Torx screws securing the

lamp housing and take out the lamp hous-

ing.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.

6. Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.

7. Plug in the connector to the bulb.

8. Secure the lamp housing with the screws

and press the panel back into place.

Removing the bulb holder

G 02

09 63

All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster can be

changed from inside the cargo area.

Switch off all lights and turn the remote

control key to position 0.

NOTE

If the error message remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced then we recom- mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

Location of the bulbs in the rear light cluster

G 02

09 64

Bulb holder.

Brake light

Position/parking lamps

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Direction indicators

Reversing lamp

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

214

NOTE

The rear fog lamp bulb is only used in one of the rear light clusters. In the left-hand rear light cluster on left-hand drive cars, and in the right-hand rear light cluster on right- hand drive cars.

Number plate lighting

G 02

09 65

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote

control key to position 0.

2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

3. Detach the lens carefully.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. Refit and screw in the lens.

Courtesy lighting

G 02

07 95

There is courtesy lighting under the instrument

panel on the driver and passenger sides.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the lens detaches.

2. Remove the blown bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

4. Refit the lens.

Cargo area

G 02

09 68

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the blown bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

Vanity mirror lighting*

G 02

02 53

Removing the mirror glass 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower

edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the

lug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge

on the left and right-hand sides (by the

black rubber sections), and prize carefully

so that the glass comes loose in the lower

edge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire

mirror glass and cover.

4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with

a new one.

Fitting the mirror glass 1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of

mirror glass back into position.

2. Then press the three lower lugs back into

position.

Interior lighting, rear

G 02

09 69

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the blown bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

216

General

All electrical functions and components are

fused to protect the car's electrical system

from damage by short circuiting and overload-

ing.

The fuses are in two different locations in the

car:

Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart- ment.

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart- ment.

Changing

If an electrical component or function does not

work, it may be because the component's fuse

was temporarily overloaded and blew.

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side

to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse

of the same colour and amperage.

Each fuse box has space for several spare

fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then

there is a fault in the component. In which case,

Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised

Volvo workshop for this to be checked.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

217

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment

G 00

74 46

The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to

replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the

same colour and amperage.

19 36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.

7-18 are of the "JCASE" type, and for their replacement we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

16 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop. Volvo rec- ommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

On the inside of the cover are tweezers to

assist removing and fitting fuses.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

02 50

1. Radiator fan 50 A

2. Power steering (excl. 1.6 litre

engine) 80 A

3. Supply to passenger com-

partment fuse box 60 A

4. Supply to passenger com-

partment fuse box 60 A

5. Climate control element,

additional heater PTC* 80 A

6. Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60 A

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A

7. ABS pump 30 A

8. ABS valves 20 A

9. Engine functions 30 A

10. Ventilation fan 40 A

11. Headlamp washers, power

roof, lockable storage com-

partment and ski hatch 20 A

12. Supply to heated rear window 30 A

13. Starter motor relay 30 A

14. Trailer wiring* 40 A

15. Power roof 30 A

16. Supply to infotainment sys-

tem 40 A

17. Windscreen wipers 30 A

18. Supply to passenger com-

partment fuse box 40 A

19. Reserve

20. Horn 15 A

21. Fuel-driven additional heater,

passenger compartment

heater* 20 A

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

219

22. Subwoofer 25 A

23. Engine control module ECM

(5-cyl. petrol), Transmission

(TCM) (5-cyl auto) 10 A

Transmission (TCM) (4-cyl.

auto.) 15 A

24. Heated fuel filter, PTC ele-

ment oil trap (5-cyl. diesel) 20 A

25. Reserve

26. Ignition switch 15 A

27. A/C compressor 10 A

28. Reserve

29. Fog lamp, front 15 A

30. Engine control module ECM

(4-cyl. diesel) 3 A

31. Voltage regulator 4-cyl. 10 A

32. Injectors (petrol), mass air

flow sensor and turbo control

(5-cyl. diesel) 10 A

33. Lambda-sond, vacuum pump

(petrol), engine control mod-

ule (5-cyl. diesel), diesel filter

heater (4-cyl. diesel) 20 A

34. Pressure switch, climate con-

trol system (5 cyl.), ignition

coils (petrol), glow plugs and

EGR emission control (5 cyl.

diesel), fuel pump (4-cyl. die-

sel) 10 A

35. Engine sensors for valves,

relay coil, air conditioning

PTC element, oil trap (petrol),

engine control module ECM

(5-cyl. diesel), canister (pet-

rol), MAF mass air flow sensor

(5-cyl. petrol, 4-cyl. diesel),

turbo control and EGR emis-

sion control (4-cyl. diesel) 15 A

36. Engine control module ECM

(not 5-cyl. diesel), accelerator

pedal position sensor,

lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

220

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment

G 02

06 01

The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses

are located under the glovebox. The box also

provides space for several spare fuses. Tools

for fuse replacement are located in the relay/

fuse box in the engine compartment, see

page 217.

Replacing fuses 1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box

by pressing in the pin in the centre of the

clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-

ing the clips.

2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the

fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove

them.

3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it

towards the seat until it stops. Lower it

completely. The fuse box can be fully

unhooked.

4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.

5. Remove the pins from the centre of the

clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the

pins into the clips. This expands the clips

and secures the trim.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

G 02

02 46

43. Phone, audio system,

RTI*, Bluetooth* 15 A

44. SRS system, engine con-

trol module ECM (5-cyl.) 10 A

45. Electrical socket, pas-

senger compartment 15 A

46. Passenger compart-

ment, glovebox and

courtesy lighting 5 A

47. Interior lighting 5 A

48. Washer 15 A

49. SRS system 10 A

50. Reserve

51. Additional heater for the

passenger compartment,

fuel filter relay, heating 10 A

52. Transmission control

module (TCM), ABS sys-

tem 5 A

53. Power steering 10 A

54. Parking assistance,

Xenon* 10 A

55. Keyless control module 20 A

56. Remote control module,

siren control module 10 A

57. Data link connector

(DLC), brake light switch 15 A

58. Main beam (right), auxili-

ary lamps relay coil 7.5 A

59. Main beam, left 7.5 A

60. Seat heating (driver's

side) 15 A

61. Seat heating (passenger

side) 15 A

62. Reserve

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

222

63. Supply, power window,

right rear 20 A

64. Lamp for door lock 5 A

65. Infotainment system 5 A

66. Infotainment control

module (ICM), climate

control 10 A

67. Reserve

68. Cruise control 5 A

69. Climate control, rain sen-

sor, BLIS button 5 A

70. Reserve

71. Reserve

72. Reserve

73. Overhead console for

interior lighting (OHC),

rear seatbelt reminder,

autodim mirror 5 A

74. Fuel pump relay 15 A

75. Reserve

76. Reserve

77. Electrical socket in cargo

area, accessory elec-

tronic module (AEM) 15 A

78. Reserve

79. Reversing lamp 5 A

80. Reserve

81. Supply, power window,

left rear 20 A

82. Supply, power window

and door, right front 25 A

83. Supply, power window

and door, left front 25 A

84. Power passenger seat 25 A

85. Power driver's seat 25 A

86. Interior lighting, cargo

area lighting, power

seats 5 A

09 Maintenance and service

09

223

G 02

09 24

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 226

Audio functions..................................................................................... 228

Radio functions..................................................................................... 232

CD functions......................................................................................... 237

Menu structure audio system............................................................. 240

Phone functions*................................................................................... 241

Menu structure phone*....................................................................... 248

Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 251

10 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

10 Infotainment system

General

10

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Infotainment system

G 02

02 45

POWER - button

Display

Keypad

MENU - Menu system

Navigation buttons

EXIT - Exits the menu system

ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates

Infotainment is a system that integrates the

audio system and phone*. The infotainment

system can be easily operated using the con-

trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see

page 62. The display (2) shows messages and

information on the current function.

Audio system

On/Off POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys-

tem. If the audio system is active when the

remote control key is turned to position 0 then

it continues to be active until the remote control

key is removed from the ignition switch. The

audio system is started automatically the next

time the remote control key is turned to posi-

tion I.

Menus

Some infotainment system functions are con-

trolled via a menu system. The current menu

level is shown at the top right of the display.

Menu options are shown in the middle of the

display.

MENU (4) leads to the menu system.

Up/down with the navigation button (5) moves between menu options.

ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates one of the menu options.

EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the menu system.

Shortcuts Menu options are numbered and can also be

selected directly with the keypad (3).

Equipment

The audio system can be equipped with differ-

ent options and different versions. There are

three audio system versions:

Performance,

High Performance* or

Premuim Sound*

FM and AM radio with RDS and CD player is

however included in each version.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the

two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right

and rear speakers. This provides a more real-

istic sound quality than that provided by stand-

ard two-channel stereo.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the

Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

1 Premium Sound.

10 Infotainment system

General

10

227

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is man-

ufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio controls

G 01

98 05

VOLUME - Knob

AM/FM Audio source selection

MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX

and USB (e.g. iPod )1

TUNING - Knob

SOUND - Button

Navigation button - Tuning and menus

Volume Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad

to regulate the volume, see page 62. Audio vol-

ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi-

cle speed, see page 231.

Audio source selection Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches

between FM1, FM2 and AM.

Repeatedly pressing MODE switches between

CD, USB and AUX.

External audio sources

General

AUX input

USB input*

The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec-

tion of an external audio source, e.g. an

iPod 1 or MP3 player.

If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player

or a USB memory stick to the USB connection

then you can control the media via the car's

audio controls.

Use the MODE button to select the external

audio source you wish to use.

1. If USB is selected then Connect device is

shown in the display.

2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB

memory stick to the USB connection in the

centre console's storage compartment

(see preceding illustration).

> The text Loading appears on the dis-

play when the system loads the file

structure on the storage media. This

takes a while.

When the loading is finished the track informa-

tion is shown on the display and it is possible

to select the track required.

Track selection can take place in two ways:

1. Select TUNING (3) clockwise or anticlock-

wise

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

229

2. or use the navigation control's (4) right or

left-hand button to scroll to the required

track.

It is also possible to change track using the

steering wheel keypad.

In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system

operates in an equivalent way to the

CD player for playing back music files. For

more information, see page 237.

NOTE

The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports the majority of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.

USB memory To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor-

ing any files other than music files in the mem-

ory. It takes considerably longer for the system

to load storage media that contains items other

than compatible music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb.

MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems

that are not supported by the audio system. For

use in the system, an MP3 player must be set

in USB Removable device/Mass Storage

Device mode.

iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power

by the USB connection via the player's con-

nection cable. However, if the player's battery

is completely discharged then it must be

charged before the player is connected.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

For information on USB and iPod in combi-

nation with Performance audio, see the acces-

sory manual for USB and iPod Music Inter-

face.

AUX Sometimes the AUX external audio source can

be heard at a different volume to the internal

audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio

volume of the external audio source is too high

then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-

vent this by adjusting the input volume of the

AUX input.

NOTE

The sound quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.

Audio settings

Adjusting audio settings Press SOUND repeatedly to browse among

the following options. Adjust by turning

TUNING.

BASS - Bass level.

TREBLE - Treble level.

FADER Balance between the front and rear speakers.

BALANCE Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub- woofer must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deactivating the subwoofer below.

CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker. Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deacti- vating surround sound below.

SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro Logic II must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Audio settings below.

Activating/deactivating the subwoofer

Press MENU and then ENTER.

Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.

Surround2

Surround settings govern the spatial

perception of the sound. Settings

and activating/deactivating are sep-

arate for each audio source.

G 02

12 16

The Dolby icon in the display indicates that

Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three

different settings for surround sound:

Dolby Pro Logic II

3 channel

Off - 2 channel stereo.

Activating/deactivating surround sound 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press

ENTER.

3. Scroll to Surround FM, Surround

AM, Surround CDor Surround

AUX and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel

or Off and press ENTER.

Equalizer front/rear4

The equalizer can be used to adjust different

frequency bands separately.

Adjusting equalizer 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press

ENTER.

3. Scroll to Equalizer front or Equalizer

rear and press ENTER.

4. The graphic on the display indicates the

audio level of the frequency in question.

5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/

down with the navigation button. Addi-

tional frequencies can be selected using

the left/right navigation button.

6. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.

2 Premium Sound. 3 Not available in AM and FM mode. 4 Certain audio systems.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

Automatic volume control5

The auto volume control function allows the

audio volume to increase as the speed of the

car increases. There are three levels to choose

from: Low, Medium and High.

Adjusting automatic volume control 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press

ENTER.

3. Scroll to Auto. volume control and

press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press

ENTER.

Automatic audio settings The acoustic properties of the passenger com-

partment are changed when speed increases

or when the roof is opened. For this reason the

character of the sound is automatically adap-

ted to these situations in order to provide the

best possible sound. The adaptation that takes

place when the roof is opened is fully auto-

matic.

Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum

sound reproduction by means of digital signal

processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-

ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment

acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-

bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes

into account the position of the volume control,

radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operating

instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*

are only intended for the user to be able to

adapt the sound reproduction according to

personal taste.

5 Not Performance Sound.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

232

Radio controls

G 01

98 06

FM/AM Wavelength selection

Station presets

TUNING Knob for station searches

SCAN Scanning

Navigation button - Tuning and menus

EXIT - Cancel current function

AUTO Automatic storage of stations

Tuning

Automatic tuning 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Give a brief press on or .

Manual tuning 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING

(3).

Tune into a station with a long press on or

. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:

Hold in or on the navigation button

depressed until the desired frequency

appears on the display.

As long as the frequency graphic appears on

the display, searching can be resumed by

briefly pressing or .

Storing stations

Ten station presets can be stored per wave-

length. FM has two memories for presets:

FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected

using the preset buttons (2) or the steering

wheel keypad.

Storing stations manually 1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold a station preset button depressed

until the message Station stored appears

on the display.

Automatic storage of stations AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta-

tions and stores them automatically in a sepa-

rate memory. The function is especially useful

in areas where the radio stations and their fre-

quencies are unfamiliar.

Starting automatic storage of stations 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until

Autostoring appears on the display.

Once Autostoring disappears from the dis-

play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-

ues in Auto mode and Off appears on the dis-

play. The automatically stored presets can now

be selected using the preset buttons (2).

Cancelling automatic storage of stations Press EXIT (6).

Selecting an auto-stored preset Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro-

vides access to the autostored presets.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7).

> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button (2).

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

233

> The radio remains in Auto mode until it

is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),

EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1).

Storing autostored presets in another

memory An autostored preset can be transferred to the

FM or AM memory.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7).

> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button.

3. Press the button under which the station

will be stored and hold it depressed until

the message Station stored appears on

the display.

> The radio exits Auto mode and the

stored station can be selected as a pre-

set.

Scanning

SCAN (4) automatically searches through a

wavelength for strong stations. When a station

is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds

before scanning is resumed.

Activating/deactivating Scan 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.

2. Press SCAN to activate.

> SCAN appears on the display. Close

using SCAN or EXIT.

Storing a station A selected station can be stored as a preset

while SCAN is active.

Press a station preset button and hold it

depressed until the message Station

stored appears on the display.

> Scanning is interrupted and the stored

station can be selected as a preset.

RDS functions

Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters

into a network. An FM transmitter in such a

network sends information that gives an

RDS radio the following functions:

Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.

Searches for programme form, such as traffic information or news.

Receives text information on current radio programme.

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only

some if its functionality.

Programme functions

In FM mode, the radio can search for stations

with certain programme types. If a required

programme type is located the radio can

switch stations interrupting the audio source

currently in use. For example, if the CD player

is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-

mission is played at a preset audio volume, see

page 236. The radio returns to the previous

audio source and audio volume when the set

programme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),

traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro-

gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in

order of priority, where alarm has the highest

priority and programme types has the lowest.

For further programme interruption settings,

see EON and REG see page 235. The pro-

gramme functions are modified via the menu

system, see page 226.

Returning to the interrupted audio

source Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio

source.

Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci-

dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be

temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

234

message ALARM! appears on the display

when an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information TP This function allows traffic informa-

tion broadcast within a set station's

RDS network to break through. TP shows that the function has been

activated. If the set station can send traffic

information then appears on the display.

G 02

12 20

Activating/deactivating TP 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

TP from current station/all stations The radio can interrupt with traffic information

from only the set (current) station or from all

stations.

1. Select an FM station.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to TP station and press ENTER.

> Either TP from current station or TP

from all stations is shown on the dis-

play.

6. Press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating TP search TP search is useful during long journeys while

an audio source other than the radio is being

played. The function automatically searches

for traffic information within different

RDS networks.

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.

News This function allows news broad-

casts within a set station's

RDS network to break through. The

message News shows that the func-

tion is active.

G 02

12 21

Activating/deactivating News 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.

News from current station/all stations The radio can interrupt with news from only the

set (current) station or from all stations.

1. Select an FM station.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

4. Scroll to News station and press

ENTER.

> Either Press ENTER to receive news

from this station only. or News from

all stations is shown on the display.

5. Press ENTER.

Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to

select different programme types,

such as Pop music and Serious

classic. The PTY symbol indicates

that the function is active. This function allows

programme types broadcast within a set sta-

tion's RDS network to break through.

G 02

12 22

Activating/deactivating PTY 1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select PTY and press

ENTER.

> A list of programme types appears:

Current affairs, Information etc. The

PTY function is activated by selecting

programme types and deactivated by

clearing all PTYs.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

235

5. Select the desired programme types or

Clear all PTY

Search PTY This function searches the entire wavelength

for the selected programme type.

1. Activate PTY.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro-

gramme types, then > appears on the display.

Press the navigation button to continue

searching for another broadcast of the

selected programme types.

Display of programme type

The programme type of the current station can

be shown on the display.

NOTE

Not all radio stations support this function.

Activating/deactivating display 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.

Radio text

Some RDS stations transmit information on

programme content, artists, etc. This informa-

tion can be shown on the display.

Activating/deactivating radio text 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.

Automatic frequency update AF

The AF function selects one of the strongest

transmitters for a set station. The radio may

sometimes need to search through the entire

FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If

this occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek

Press EXIT to cancel. appears in the display.

Activating/deactivating AF 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.

Regional radio programmes REG

This function causes the radio to con-

tinue with a regional transmitter even

if its signal strength is low.

Regional indicates that the function

is active. The regional function is normally

deactivated.

G 02

12 23

Activating/deactivating REG 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.

Enhanced Other Networks EON

The EON function is especially useful in urban

areas with many regional radio stations. It

allows the distance between the car and the

radio station transmitter to determine when

programme functions should interrupt the cur-

rent audio source.

Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.

Distant1 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.

1 Factory sett.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

236

Activating/deactivating EON 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

3. Scroll to EON and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press

ENTER.

Resetting RDS functions

Resets all radio settings to the original factory

settings.

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and

press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.

Volume control, programme types

The interrupting programme types are heard at

the volume selected for each programme type.

If the volume level is adjusted during the pro-

gramme interruption, the new level is saved

until the next programme interruption.

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

CD function controls

G 01

98 07

Navigation button Fast forward/rewind,

track selection and menus

CD changer position selection*

CD insertion/eject

CD insertion/eject slot

MODE - Audio source selection CD or

AUX*

TUNING - Knob for track selection

Starting playback (CD player) If a music CD is in the player when the audio

system is in CD mode then playback is started

automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and

change to CD mode by pressing MODE.

Starting playback (CD changer*) If a CD position with a music CD is already

selected when the audio system is activated

then playback starts automatically. Otherwise

change to CD changer mode using MODE and

select a disc with the number buttons 16 or

Up/Down on the navigation button.

Insert a CD 1. Select an empty position with buttons 1

6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.

> An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert disc shows that a

new disc can be inserted. The

CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.

2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.

CD eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for

approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-

inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-

ton .

Eject all discs with a long press on the eject

button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by

disc. The message Eject all is shown in the

display.

Pause If the volume is turned down completely, the

CD player is stopped. The player is restarted

when volume is increased.

Audio files* The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA

format audio files.

NOTE

Certain types of copy-protected audio files cannot be read by the player.

When a CD containing audio files is inserted

into the player the disc's directory structure is

read in. It may take a while before playback

starts due to the quality of the disc.

Navigation and playback If a disc containing audio files is inside the

CD player then ENTER displays the disc's

directory structure. The directory structure is

navigated in the same way as the audio sys-

tem's menu structure. Audio files have the

symbol and directories have the symbol

. Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play-

back of the other files in the same directory

continues. Directory change takes place auto-

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

238

matically when all files in the current directory

have been played back.

Press left/right on the navigation button if the

display is not wide enough to show the whole

audio file name.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio

files Short presses right/left on the navigation but-

ton are used to scroll between

CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used

to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or

the steering wheel keypad) can also be used

for this purpose.

Scan CD This function plays the first 10 seconds of each

CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate.

Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play-

back of the current CD track/audio file.

Random This function plays the tracks in random order.

The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-

led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.

Different messages appear on the display

depending on which random function has been

selected.

RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played

RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.

RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio files in a directory on the current CD are played.

Activating/deactivating (CD player) If a normal music CD is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

If a disc with audio files is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press

ENTER.

Activating/deactivating (CD changer) If a normal music CD is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press

ENTER.

The option All discs only applies to the music

CDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press

ENTER.

The function is deactivated when another CD

is selected.

Disc text If title information is stored on a music CD then

it can be shown on the display1.

Activating/deactivating 1. Start CD playback.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.

CDs Using low quality CD discs could result in poor

or non-existent sound.

1 Applies to CD changer.

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

239

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure audio system

10

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview

FM menu

1. News

2. TP

3. PTY

4. Radio text

5. Advanced radio settings

6. Audio settings*

AM menu

1. Audio settings*

CD menu

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text

5. Audio settings*

CD changer menu

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text

5. Audio settings*

AUX menu

1. AUX volume

2. News

3. TP

4. Audio settings*

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

Overview - Phone system components

6

5

432

1

G 01

98 41

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Phone system components

1. Antenna

2. Steering wheel keypad Most phone system functions can be accessed

via the keypad. see page 243.

3. Microphone The hands free microphone is integrated in the

roof console beside the rearview mirror.

4. Centre console control panel All phone functions (except call volume) can be

regulated via the control panel.

5. Privacy handset

6. SIM card reader

General

Always put traffic safety first.

If the driver needs to use the privacy hand- set, park the car in a safe place first.

Switch off the phone system when refuel- ling the car.

Switch off the system near blasting work.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out phone system servicing.

Emergency calls

Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made

without a SIM card as long as there is coverage

by a GSM operator.

Making an emergency call 1. Activate the phone.

2. Ring the emergency number that applies to

your region (within EU: 112).

3. Press ENTER.

IDIS

The IDIS system (Intelligent Driver Information

System) allows incoming phone calls and SMS

messages to be delayed so that the driver can

concentrate on driving. Incoming calls and

SMS messages can be delayed 5 seconds

before they are connected. Missed calls are

shown on the display. IDIS can be deactivated

using menu function 5.5, see page 248.

SIM card

G 02

02 44

The phone can only be used with a valid SIM

card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are

available from various network operators. Con-

tact your network operator if you experience

difficulties with the SIM card.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact your network operator if you need to change your SIM card.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

Double SIM cards Many network operators offer two SIM cards

for the same phone number. The extra SIM

card can be used in the car.

Inserting the SIM card 1. Switch off the phone and open the glove-

box.

2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM

card reader, see illustration on page 242.

3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the

metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of

the SIM card should align with the bevel of

the SIM card holder.

4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.

Menus

Page 248 describes how to control phone

functions with the menu system.

Traffic safety

For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu

system cannot be accessed at speeds in

excess of 8 km/h.

Phone controls

G 01

98 09

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME - Control the background vol-

ume from the radio, for example, during a

call

Number and letter buttons

MENU - Opens the main menu

EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-

acters

Navigation button Scroll in menus and

character rows

ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but-

ton reveals latest dialled numbers

PHONE - On/off and standby mode

Steering wheel keypad

G 02

02 43

When the phone is active, the steering wheel

keypad is locked to phone functions. To con-

trol the audio system, the phone must be in

standby mode (standby).

ENTER Works the same as on the control

panel

EXIT Works the same as on the control

panel

Call volume Increase/decrease

Navigation buttons Scroll in menus

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

On/Off

A handset appears in the display when the

phone system is active or in standby mode

(standby). If the remote control key is turned to

position 0 when the phone is in one of these

modes, the phone automatically resumes this

mode the next time the remote control key is

turned to position I or II.

Activating the phone system Phone system functions can only be used

when the phone is in active mode.

1. Press PHONE.

2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press

ENTER.

Deactivating the phone system No calls can be received when the phone is

deactivated.

Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is

deactivated.

Standby mode (standby) In standby mode, the audio system can be in

use while calls are received. However, it is not

possible to make calls when in standby mode.

Putting the phone in standby mode The phone must first be in active mode before

it can be put in standby mode.

Press PHONE.

Activating from standby mode Press PHONE.

Making and receiving calls

If the privacy handset is raised when a phone

call is started, the sound will come from the

handsfree system. For information on switch-

ing between privacy handset and handsfree

during a call, see page 246.

To call 1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,

see page 246.

3. Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release

the handset by pressing it down.

Receiving a call For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see

page 248.

Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release

the handset by pressing it down.

Ending a call Press EXIT or hang up the handset.

Refusing a call Press EXIT.

Call waiting A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates

that there is another incoming call. Answer? appears on the display. The call can be refused

or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming

call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.

Putting a call on hold/resuming a call 1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Hold or Hold off and press

ENTER.

Dialling a third party 1. Put the call on hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party.

Switching between calls 1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.

Starting a conference call A conference call consists of at least three par-

ties that can talk to one another. Once a con-

ference call has been initiated, no more parties

can be connected. All calls are ended when a

conference call is ended.

1. Start two phone calls.

2. Press MENU or ENTER.

3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

Volume

The phone uses the driver's door speaker.

Call volume Call volume is regulated with

the steering wheel keypad.

If the privacy handset is used,

volume is regulated with a

wheel on the side of the hand-

set.

Audio system volume Audio system volume is temporarily lowered

during a phone call. Once the call is ended the

previous volume is resumed. If the volume is

regulated during the call, the new level is

retained once the call is ended. Sound can also

be automatically muted during a phone call,

see menu 5.4.3, on page 250. This function

only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys-

tem.

Entering text

Text is entered using the phone keypad.

1. Press the key with the desired character -

once for the first character on the button,

twice for the second, etc. See table.

2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a

row are to be entered using the same but-

ton, press * or wait a few seconds.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-

acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered

characters.

Key Function

space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )

a b c 2

d e f 3

g h i 4

j k l 5

m n o 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

w x y z 9

Pressed briefly if two char-

acters shall be entered after

each other with the same

key.

Key Function

+ 0 @ * # & $ / %

Switch between upper and

lower case.

Handling numbers

Calling the last number dialled The phone automatically stores the last phone

numbers dialled.

1. Press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.

Phone book If the phone book contains a live caller's con-

tact information then this is shown in the dis-

play. Contact information can be stored on the

SIM card and in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book 1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to New number and press ENTER.

4. Enter a name and press ENTER.

5. Enter a number and press ENTER.

6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone and press

ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Searching for contacts in the phone book Use the down arrow of the navigation button

instead of MENU for direct access to the

Search menu.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item and

press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

Copying entries between the SIM card

and Phone book 1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.

Deleting contacts from the phone book 1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item and

press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press

ENTER.

6. Scroll to Delete and press ENTER.

Erase all contacts 1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and

press ENTER.

If required, enter phone code. The factory-set

default code is 1234.

Speed dial A keypad button (19) can be used as a speed

dial number for a contact in the phone book.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Speed dial and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select numbers and press

ENTER.

5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for

the speed dial number and press ENTER.

6. Enter the first few letters of the item and

press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu

system.

Calling using speed dial Briefly press the required keypad button,

followed by ENTER.

NOTE

When the phone is switched on, it takes a while before speed dialling is available.

To use the speed dial function Speed dial

must be activated in the Phonebook menu,

see page 249.

Calling from the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phonebook and press ENTER.

> All contacts in the phone book memory

are displayed. The number of contacts

displayed can be reduced by entering

part of the contact's name.

3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.

NOTE

Press ENTER to dial.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

NOTE

Hold in the required letter/button in the key- pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor- responding letter in the phone book.

Functions during a call

Several functions are available during a call.

Some functions can only be used when a call

is on hold.

Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access

the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol-

lowing alternatives:

1. Mute/Mute off Mute mode.

2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or

resume a call.

3. Handsfree/Handset - Use handsfree or

the privacy handset.

4. Phonebook Show phone book.

5. Join Conference calling (available if more

than three parties are connected)

6. Swap Switch between two calls (availa-

ble if up to three parties are connected).

SMS - Short Message Service

Reading SMS 1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.

> The message text is shown in the dis-

play. Additional selections can be made

by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT

depressed to leave the menu system.

Writing and sending 1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.

4. Enter text and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

IMEI number

To block the phone, you must provide your

network operator with the phone's IMEI num-

ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro-

grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show

this number in the display. Write it down and

keep it in a safe place.

Specifications

Output 2 W

SIM card Small

Memory entries 250A

SMS (Short Message Serv-

ice)

Yes

Data/Fax No

Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes

A The capacity of the SIM card's memory varies depending on SIM card type.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Phone menu

1. Call register

1.1. Missed calls

1.2. Received calls

1.3. Dialled no.

1.4. Erase list

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled no.

1.5. Call duration

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phonebook

2.1. New number

2.2. Search

2.3. Copy all

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial

2.4.1. Active

2.4.2. Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

2.6. Erase phone

2.7. Memory status

3. Messages

3.1. Read

3.2. Write

3.3. Message settings

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time

3.3.3. Message type

4. Call options

4.1. Send my no.

4.2. Call waiting

4.3. Automatic answer

4.4. Auto redial

4.5. Voice mail number

4.6. Call divert

4.6.1. All calls

4.6.2. When engag.

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Tel. settings

5.1. Network

5.1.1. Auto

5.1.2. Manual select

5.2. SIM security

5.2.1. On

5.2.2. Off

5.2.3. Auto

5.3. Change code

5.3.1. PIN code

5.3.2. Phone code

5.4. Audio

5.4.1. Ring volume

5.4.2. Ring signal

5.4.3. Mute radio

5.4.4. Msg. beep

5.5. IDIS

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249

5.6 Factory settings

Description of menu options

1. Call register

1.1. Missed calls List of missed calls. You can choose to call,

erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.2. Received calls List of received calls. You can choose to call,

erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.3. Dialled no. List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,

erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.4. Erase list Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and

1.3 as below.

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls erased

1.4.3. Received calls erased

1.4.4. Dialled calls erased

1.5. Call duration Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.

To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book

2.1. New number Store names and phone numbers in the phone

book, see page 245.

2.2. Search Search for a name in the phone book.

2.3. Copy all Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM

card to the phone memory.

2.3.1. From SIM to phone memory

2.3.2. From phone to SIM memory.

2.4. Speed dial A number stored in the phone book can be

stored as a speed dial number.

2.5. Erase SIM Erase the entire SIM card memory.

2.6. Erase phone Erase the entire phone memory.

2.7. Memory status Shows how many positions are occupied in the

SIM card and phone memory. The table shows

how many of the total number of positions are

occupied, e.g. 100 (250).

3. Messages

3.1. Read Received text messages. Select whether to

erase, forward, change or save the entire mes-

sage or parts of it.

3.2. Write Write a message using the keypad. Choose

whether to save or send it.

3.3. Message sett Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-

sage centre to which messages are to be trans-

ferred as well as how long they are to be saved

at the message centre. Contact your network

operator for information on message settings.

Normally, these settings should not be altered.

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time

3.3.3. Message type

4. Call options

4.1. Send my no. Displays or hides your phone number to/from

the person you call. Contact your network

operator regarding ex-directory numbers.

4.2. Call waiting Be alerted during a phone call that there is

another incoming call.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4.3. Auto answer Automatically answers incoming calls.

4.4. Auto redial Automatically calls a previously engaged num-

ber.

4.5. Voice mail number Stores voice mail number.

4.6. Diversion Choose when and what type of calls are to be

diverted to a specified phone number.

4.6.1. All calls

This setting only applies during the call in pro-

gress

4.6.2. When engag.

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Phone settings

5.1. Network Choose a network automatically or manually.

The selected network is shown in the display in

the phone's basic mode.

5.1.1. Auto

5.1.2. Manual select

5.2. SIM security Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the

phone should automatically give the PIN code.

5.2.1. On

5.2.2. Off

5.2.3. Auto

5.3. Edit codes Change PIN or phone code. Write the codes

down and keep them in a safe place.

5.3.1. PIN code

5.3.2. Phone code.

The factory-set phone code 1234 is used until

you change to your own code.

5.4. Sounds 5.4.1. Volume

Adjust the ring tone volume.

5.4.2. Ring signal

There are seven different ring tones.

5.4.3. Mute radio. On/off

5.4.4. Msg. beep

5.5. IDIS If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming

calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving

situation.

5.5. Factory sett. Reset the system's factory settings.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

General

G 02

95 03

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone

Centre console

BluetoothTM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-

tem. The audio system then works handsfree,

with the option to control a range of the mobile

phone's functions remotely. The microphone is

fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone

can always be operated by its own keys irre-

spective of whether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control

panel in the centre console (3), see page 243.

Remember

The menus are controlled from the centre con-

sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-

eral information on menus, see page 248.

Activating/deactivating A short press on PHONE activates the hands-

free function. The text PHONE at the top of the

display shows that it is in phone mode. The

symbol shows that the handsfree func-

tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates the

handsfree function and disconnects a con-

nected phone.

Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways

depending on whether or not it has been con-

nected previously. To connect a mobile phone

for the first time, follow the instructions below:

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible

via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's

manual or www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function with

PHONE.

> Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobile

phones have already been registered

then these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone.

> The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takes

approximately 30 seconds. The mobile

phones detected are specified with their

respective BluetoothTM name in the dis-

play. The handsfree function's

BluetoothTM name is shown in the

mobile phone as My Car.

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the

audio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audio

system display via the mobile phone key-

pad.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function with

PHONE. If there is a phone connected,

disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see

the mobile phone's manual.

3. Select My Car in the list of units detected

in your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile

phone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Car from the

mobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connected

automatically to the audio system while the text

Synchronising is shown in the display. For

more information on how mobile phones are

registered, see page 253.

When the connection is established the symbol

is shown and the mobile phone's

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

the mobile phone can be controlled from the

audio system.

To call 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown

at the top of the display and that the

symbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,

see page 254.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the

mobile phone moves out of the audio system's

range. For more information on connection,

see page 253.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-

vating the handsfree function with one long

press on PHONE. The handsfree function is

also deactivated when the engine is switched

off or when a door is opened1.

When the mobile phone has been discon-

nected an ongoing call can be continued with

the mobile phone's built-in microphone and

speaker.

NOTE

Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the

audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.

Refuse or end with EXIT.

Auto answer The automatic answer function means that

calls are accepted automatically. Activate/

deactivate under Phone menu Phone

settings Call options Automatic

answer.

In-call menu Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call

to access the following functions:

Microphone muted - audio system microphone is muted.

Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.

1 Applies to Keyless Drive.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.

Phone book searching in the phone book.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.

Audio settings

Call volume The call volume can be regulated when the

handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the

steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.

Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,

the audio system volume is controlled as usual

with VOLUME. In order to control audio system

volume during an ongoing call you have to

switch to one of the audio sources.

The audio source can be automatically muted

for incoming calls under Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Mute radio.

Ring volume

Go to Phone menu Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring volume and

adjust with / on the navigation button.

Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-

nals that can be selected under Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring signals... Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ring

signal2, go to Phone menu Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring signals...

Use mobile phone signal.

More on registering and connecting

A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-

istered. Registration is performed once per

phone. After registration the phone no longer

needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of

one mobile phone can be connected at a time.

Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth

menu Bluetooth Remove phone.

Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the

last mobile phone connected is in range it is

connected automatically. When the audio sys-

tem searches for the last phone connected its

name is shown in the display. To change over

to manual connection of another phone, press

EXIT.

Manual connection If you want to connect a mobile phone other

than the last connected or change the con-

nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

1. Set the audio system in phone mode.

2. Press PHONE and select one of the

phones in the list.

The connection can also be made via the menu

system under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth

Connect phone or Change phone.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Phonebook

All use of the phone book presupposes that the

text PHONE is shown at the top of the display

and that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone

book from each registered mobile phone. The

phone book is copied automatically to the

audio system during each connection. Deacti-

vate the function under Phone settings

Synchronise phone book. Searching for con-

tacts is only performed in the connected

mobile phone's phone book.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller's

contact information then this is shown in the

display.

Searching for contacts The easiest way to search in the phone book is

with long presses on the keys 29. This starts

a search in the phone book based on the key's

first letter.

The phone book can also be reached with /

on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can also

be performed from the phone book's Search

menu under Phonebook Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and

press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to

call.

Voice recognition The mobile phone's voice recognition function

for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

Voice mail number Voice mail number can be changed under

Phone settings Call options Voice mail

number. If there is no number stored then this

menu can be reached with one long press on

1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored

number.

Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-

tion at each new connection and are then

updated during the connection. Press ENTER

to show the last dialled. Other call lists are

available under Call register.

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.

Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre con-

sole. Press once for the key's first character,

twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for

more characters, see the table on page 245.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-

acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input

characters. / on the navigation button

scrolls between the characters.

Menu structure - Bluetooth

1. Missed calls

2. Received calls

3 Dialled calls

4. Phonebook

4.1. Search

4.2. Copy from phone

5. Bluetooth...

5.1. Change phone

5.2. Connect phone

5.3. Disconnect phone

5.4. Connect from mobile phone

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

6. Phone settings

6.1. Call options

6.1.1. Auto reply

6.1.2. Voice mail number

6.2. Sounds and volume

6.3. Synchronise phone book

G 00

00 00

256

Type designation................................................................................... 258

Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 261

Engine specifications............................................................................ 264

Engine oil............................................................................................... 265

Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 269

Fuel....................................................................................................... 271

Catalytic converter................................................................................ 275

Electrical system................................................................................... 276

Type approval....................................................................................... 278

11 SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

258

G 03

20 86

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

259

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle

identification and engine numbers can facili-

tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding

the car and when ordering spare parts and

accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification

number, maximum permissible weights,

codes for colour and upholstery and type

approval number.

Label for parking heater.

Engine type designation, component and

serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber:

manual gearbox

, automatic gearbox

VIN number (type and model year desig-

nation plus chassis number).

Further information on the car is presented in

the registration document.

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

260

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

261

Dimensions

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2640

B Length 4582

C Load length, floor,

folded seat 850

D Boot lid, raised approx.

200

E1 Height 1400

E2 Height approx.

2000

Dimensions mm

F Load height with roof up

Load height with roof

down

525

265

G Front track 1550

H Rear track 1836

I Load width, floor 960

Dimensions mm

J Width 1770

K Width including door

mirrors 2025

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

262

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank

90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,

and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see

table) influences the payload and is not

included in the kerb weight.

Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle

weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Carpets, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For decal location, see page 258.

Max. total weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

Towing capacity and towball load

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

263

Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

1500 75

Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

700 50

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

264

Overview

Engine Output (kW/ rpm)

Output (hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/ rpm)

No. of cylinders

Bore (mm)

Stroke (mm)

Swept volume (litres)

Compres- sion ratio

2.4 B5244S4 103/5000 140/5000 220/4000 5 83 90.0 2,435 10.3:1

2.4i B5244S5 125/6000 170/6000 230/4400 5 83 90.0 2,435 10.3:1

T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500

5000

5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1

2.0D D4204T 100/4000 136/4000 320/2000 4 85 88.0 1,997 18.5:1

D5 D5244T8 132/4000 180/4000 350/1750

3250

5 81 93.2 2,401 17.3:1

D5 D5244T13 132/4000 180/4000 400/2000

2750

5 81 93.2 2,401 17.3:1

D5 D5244T9A 120/4000 163/4000 340/1750

3000

5 81 93.2 2,401 17.3:1

A Belgium

Engine type designation, component and serial

number can be read on the engine, see

page 258.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

265

Adverse driving conditions

Check the oil level more frequently for long

journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C.

This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-

ture or oil consumption.

Also check the oil level more often if the car is

often driven short distances (less than 10 km)

when temperatures are low (below +5 C).

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse

driving conditions. It provides extra protection

for the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Viscosity chart

G 02

02 36

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

266

Oil decal

Engine oil grade

Engine variant Volume between

MIN-MAX (litres)

VolumeA

(litres)

G 03

20 80

Oil decal location in engine compartment, see

page 202.

Oil grade: ACEA A3/B3/B4

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

When driving under adverse conditions, use

ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

2.4B B5244S5 1.3 5.8

2.4i B5244S4 1.3 5.8

T5 B5254T7 1 3 5.8

A Including filter change B Does not apply to Europe, for Europe see oil ACEA A5/B5

.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

267

Engine oil grade

Engine variant Volume between

MIN-MAX (litres)

VolumeA

(litres)

G 03

20 79

Oil decal location in engine compartment, see

page 202.

Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

When driving under adverse conditions, use

ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

2.0D D4204T 1 8 5.0

A Including filter change

.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

268

Engine oil grade

Engine variant Volume between

MIN-MAX (litres)

VolumeA

(litres)

G 03

20 78

Oil decal location in engine compartment, see

page 202.

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

2.4 B5244S5B 1.3 5.5

2.4i B5244S4 B 1.3 5.5

T5 B5254T7 B 1 3 5.5

D5 D5244T8 1.5 6.0

D5244T9

(Only Belgium)

D5244T13

A Including filter change B Europe only, for other markets see oil ACEA A3/B3/B4

.

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

269

Overview

IMPORTANT

The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby for servicing. Volvo recommends that you con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Gearbox oil

Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

2.4 petrol Manual 5-speed, M56 2.1 MTF 97309

2.4 petrol Automatic, AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

2.4i petrol Manual 5-speed, M56 2.1 BOT 350M3

2.4i petrol Automatic, AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

T5 petrol Manual 6-speed, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3

T5 petrol Automatic, AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

2.0D diesel Manual 6-speed, MMT6 1.7 BOT 350M3

2.0D diesel Automatic, MPS6 5.5 BOT 341

D5 diesel Manual 6-speed, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3

D5 diesel Automatic, AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

270

Fluids

Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade

Coolant 5-cyl. manual gearbox 9.5 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed

with waterA, see packaging. The ther-

mostat starts opening at 90 C.5-cyl. aut. gearbox 10.0

4-cyl. diesel 9.5

Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)

Oil: PAG

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering fluid Power steering 1.0-1.2 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product

with same specifications.

Washer fluid 5-cyl. petrol/diesel 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended

by Volvo, mixed with water for temper-

atures below freezing.

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

271

Consumption, CO2 emissions and tank volume

Engine Gearbox Emissions of car- bon dioxide CO2

(g/km)

Consumption (litre/100 km)

Tank volume (litres)

2.4 B5244S5 Manual 5 speed (M56) 212 8.9 approx. 62

2.4i B5244S4 Manual 5 speed (M56H) 215 9.0 approx. 62

2.4i B5244S4 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 229 9.6 approx. 62

T5 B5254T7 Manual 6 speed (M66) 209 8.9 approx. 62

T5 B5254T7 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 219 9.4 approx. 62

2.0D D4204T Manual 6 speed (MMT6) 158 6.0 approx. 62

2.0D D4204T

(EURO3)

(EURO4)

Powershift (MPS6) 167 6.3 approx. 62

D5 D5244T13 Manual 6 speed (M66) 174 6.6 approx. 62

D5 D5244T8 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 196 7.4 approx. 62

D5 D5244T9

(Only Belgium)

Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 193 7.3 approx. 62

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

272

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide Official fuel consumption figures are based on

a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU

Directive 80/1268/EEC comb. and 92/21/EEC.

Fuel consumption figures may change if the car

is equipped with extra equipment that affects

the car's weight. The manner in which the car

is driven, and other non-technical factors can

also affect fuel consumption.

Consumption is higher and power output lower

for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

General information on fuel

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel splashing in the eyes.

If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

Petrol

Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most

engines can be run with octane ratings of 91,

95 and 98 RON.

91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C,

fuel with the highest possible octane rating is

recommended for optimum performance and

fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.

Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

273

Diesel

Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204

standards.

Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,

such as excessively high volumes of sulphur

particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from

well-known producers. Never use diesel of

dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin

precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which

can lead to ignition problems. Special diesel

fuel designed for low temperatures around

freezing point is available from the major oil

companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-

peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-

cipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is

reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When

refuelling, check that the area around the fuel

filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the

paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-

gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

IMPORTANT

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

Empty tank After stalling due to fuel shortage the fuel sys-

tem needs a short time to perform a check.

Proceed as follows before the engine is

started:

1. Fill at least 5 litres of diesel in the fuel tank.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and turn to key position II (see page 136).

3. Wait for about 1 minute.

4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/ or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control key to start position III.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the

fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-

tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet

or if you suspect that the car has been filled

with contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil-

ter, which results in more efficient emission

control. The particles in the exhaust gases are

collected in the filter during normal driving. So-

called "regeneration" is started in order to burn

away the particles and empty the filter. This

requires the engine to have reached normal

operating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-

ically at an interval of approximately 300900

km depending on driving conditions. Regener-

ation normally takes between 10 - 20 minutes.

It may take a little longer at a low average

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly

during regeneration.

The rear window heating may be activated

automatically to increase the load on the

engine during regeneration without warning.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in

cold weather then the engine does not reach

normal operating temperature. This means that

regeneration of the diesel particle filter does

not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become

approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow

information symbol on the instrument panel

illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER

FULL - SEE MANUAL is shown on the instru-

ment panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car

until the engine reaches normal operating tem-

perature, preferably on a main road or motor-

way. The car should then be driven for approx-

imately 20 minutes more.

When regeneration is complete the message is

cleared automatically.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that

the engine reaches normal operating tempera-

ture more quickly.

11 Specifications

Catalytic converter

11

275

General

The purpose of the catalytic converter is to

purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of

exhaust gases close to the engine so that it

quickly reaches operating temperature. The

catalytic converter consists of a monolith

(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel

walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum,

rhodium and palladium. These metals act as

catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate

a chemical reaction without being used up

themselves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

The Lambda-sond is part of a control system

intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel

economy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content

of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This

value is fed into an electronic system that con-

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel

to air directed to the engine is continuously

adjusted. Together with the three-way catalytic

converter, these adjustments create optimal

conditions for efficient combustion of the

harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon

monoxide and nitrous oxides).

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

276

General

12 V system with a voltage-regulated alterna-

tor. Single pole system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors.

If the battery is changed, replace it with a bat-

tery of the same cold start capacity and reserve

capacity as the original (see the decal on the

battery).

Battery

Engine Voltage, V Cold start capacity

(CCA, Cold Cranking Amperes), A

Reserve capacity,

minutes

Capacity, Ah

4 and 5-cyl. petrol 12 590 100 60

600 A 120 70

4 and 5-cyl. diesel 12 700 B 135 80

A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.

Bulbs

Lighting Output (W) Type

Dipped beam 55 H7

Main beam 55 H9

Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 P21W

Direction indicators, rear/front 21 PY21W

Rear position/parking lamps, rear side marker lamps 4 P21/5W

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277

Lighting Output (W) Type

Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate lighting 5 C5W

Vanity mirror* 1.2 Tubular lamp

Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps 5 W5W

Fog lamps 55 H8

Glovebox lighting 3 Tubular lamp

11 Specifications

Type approval

11

278

Remote control key system

Country and region

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,

E, EST, F, FIN, GB,

GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,

LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,

SK, SLO

Delphi hereby

certifies that this

remote control key

system conforms to

the essential char-

acteristic require-

ments and other rel-

evant regulations of

directive 1999/5/EC.

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,

Germany R-

LPD1-03-0151

BR

TW

ETC093LPD0155

Certification of the Keyless Drive system

Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies

that this equipment type 5WK4 8952,

5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the

essential characteristic requirements and other

relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.

11 Specifications

11

279

12 Alphabetical Index

12

280

A

A/C

electronic climate control..................... 82

ABS fault............................................ 47, 145

Additional heater (Diesel)........................... 87

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 168

Dual Xenon headlamps....................... 168

halogen headlamp.............................. 168

AF automatic frequency update........... 235

Airbag........................................................ 20

activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 23

deactivating/activating......................... 23

driver's and front passenger side......... 21

Air conditioning

ECC...................................................... 80

general.................................................. 78

Air distribution............................................ 83

ECC...................................................... 82

Air quality system, ECC............................. 81

Air vents..................................................... 79

Alarm........................................................ 126

alarm indicator.................................... 126

arming................................................. 126

automatic alarm activation................. 127

deactivating a triggered alarm............ 127

disarming............................................ 127

RDS traffic warning............................. 233

reduced alarm level............................ 128

testing the alarm system.................... 128

Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 120

Approach light, duration............................ 69

setting................................................... 72

Audio, see also Sound............................. 228

Audio volume

phone.......................................... 245, 253

phone/media player............................ 253

ring signal, phone............................... 253

Auto

climate control settings........................ 80

AUTO

storing stations................................... 232

Auto climate............................................... 80

Automatic car washes............................. 190

Automatic gearbox

manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 141

towing and recovery........................... 155

trailer................................................... 159

Automatic locking.................................... 124

Automatic relocking................................. 123

Autostart.................................................. 136

Auto volume control................................ 231

Auxiliary heater.......................................... 87

Average fuel consumption......................... 56

B

Bass speaker........................................... 229

Battery............................................. 208, 276

hanging the battery in the remote con-

trol key................................................ 121

maintenance............................... 199, 208

overload.............................................. 133

specifications...................................... 276

start assistance................................... 158

symbols on the battery....................... 208

Bioethanol E85........................................ 271

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 151

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 70, 151

Bluetooth

handsfree............................................ 251

mute microphone............................... 252

transfer call to mobile......................... 252

Boarding

rear seat................................................ 90

Bonnet, opening...................................... 200

c

12 Alphabetical Index

12

281

Boot lid

driving with open boot lid................... 132

locking/unlocking................................ 122

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 206

Brake light.................................................. 54

Brakes

anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 145

brake light............................................. 54

emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 146

emergency brake lights........................ 54

handbrake............................................. 64

Brake system........................................... 145

Bulb holder

removal............................................... 213

Bulbs

changing............................................. 210

Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 210, 276

C

Calls

functions during a call................ 244, 247

incoming............................................. 252

operation..................................... 244, 252

volume in phone................................. 245

Car care................................................... 190

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 192

Cargo area............................................... 106

cargo separator.................................. 106

electrical socket.................................. 108

loading assistance.............................. 106

load retaining eyelets.......................... 107

ski hatch............................................. 108

Car settings............................................... 72

Car upholstery......................................... 192

Car wash.................................................. 190

Catalytic converter................................... 275

recovery.............................................. 155

CD discs

storage compartment......................... 104

CD functions............................................ 237

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 205

Checks

fluids and oils...................................... 203

Children..................................................... 34

child seats and side airbags................. 25

location in the car................................. 34

location in the car, table....................... 35

safety.................................................... 34

Child seat................................................... 34

Child seats................................................. 34

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37

Cigarette lighter socket

front seat............................................... 52

Cleaning

automatic car washes......................... 190

car wash............................................. 190

rims..................................................... 190

seatbelts............................................. 193

upholstery........................................... 192

Climate control

general.................................................. 78

personal preferences............................ 71

Climate control settings

auto....................................................... 80

Clock, adjustment...................................... 71

Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 206

Coat hanger............................................. 103

Cold start................................................. 143

automatic gearbox.............................. 143

Collision

crash mode........................................... 33

12 Alphabetical Index

12

282

Colour code, paint................................... 194

Combined instrument panel...................... 45

Compass................................................... 67

calibration............................................. 67

setting the zone.................................... 67

Condensation in headlamps.................... 190

Coolant.................................................... 205

Cooling system........................................ 132

Crash, see Collision................................... 33

Cruise control............................................ 60

D

Deadlocks................................................ 124

deactivation........................................ 124

temporary deactivation....................... 124

Diesel....................................................... 273

Diesel: engine preheater............................ 47

Diesel particle filter.................................. 273

Dipstick, electronic.................................. 203

Direction indicators.................................... 55

Disc text................................................... 238

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 143

Display, messages..................................... 50

Display lighting.......................................... 54

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 226, 230

Door mirrors............................................... 69

Driver's door control panel.................. 44, 65

Driving

cooling system.................................... 132

economical......................................... 132

in water............................................... 132

slippery driving conditions.................. 132

with trailer........................................... 159

Driving in water........................................ 132

Driving with a trailer

towball load........................................ 262

towing capacity.................................. 262

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 147

DSTC, see also Stability system

symbol.................................................. 47

During a call, functions............................ 247

E

Economical driving.................................. 132

ECO pressure.......................................... 176

table.................................................... 176

Electrical socket

cargo area........................................... 108

centre console...................................... 52

Electrical system...................................... 276

Emergency calls...................................... 242

Emergency equipment

warning triangle.................................. 179

Emergency puncture repair..................... 184

Emission control

fault indicator........................................ 47

Engine block heater

fuel-driven............................................. 84

Engine compartment............................... 200

coolant................................................ 205

power steering fluid............................ 206

Engine oil......................................... 203, 265

adverse driving conditions.................. 265

capacities........................................... 265

filter..................................................... 202

oil grade.............................................. 265

oil pressure........................................... 48

12 Alphabetical Index

12

283

Engine specifications............................... 264

Entry, keyless............................................. 72

Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's

manual....................................................... 13

EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 235

Equalizer.................................................. 230

Error messages.......................................... 97

Error messages in BLIS........................... 153

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17

External dimensions................................ 261

F

Fan

ECC...................................................... 80

Fast-wind................................................. 238

First aid equipment.................................. 181

Floor mats.................................................. 93

Fluids, capacities..................................... 269

Fluids and oils.................................. 202, 269

Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-

ment......................................................... 202

Fluids and oils general............................. 202

Fog lamps

rear........................................................ 54

Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 54

Frequency update, automatic.................. 235

FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13

Fuel

CO2 emissions.................................... 271

consumption....................................... 271

fuel consumption, display..................... 56

fuel economy...................................... 176

level indicator........................................ 47

parking heater....................................... 84

refuelling............................................. 134

Fuses....................................................... 216

box in the engine compartment.......... 217

changing............................................. 216

general................................................ 216

relay/fuse box in the passenger com-

partment............................................. 220

G

Gearbox

manual................................................ 139

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 142

Geartronic................................................ 141

General information on fuel..................... 271

Glovebox................................................. 103

locking................................................ 114

Gross vehicle weight............................... 262

H

Handbrake................................................. 64

Hazard warning flashers............................ 63

Headlamps................................................. 53

Heating

front seats............................................. 82

rearview and door mirrors.................... 82

rear window.......................................... 82

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 58

HomeLink EU.......................................... 73

Home safe lighting............................... 55, 69

setting................................................... 72

12 Alphabetical Index

12

284

I

IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys-

tem........................................................... 242

Ignition keys............................................. 137

IMEI number............................................ 247

Immobiliser...................................... 112, 137

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 27

Information display.................................... 50

Infotainment system

menus................................................. 226

Instrument lighting..................................... 54

Instrument overview

left-hand drive....................................... 40

right-hand drive.................................... 42

Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 100

Interior rearview mirror............................... 67

automatic dimming............................... 67

Intermittent wiping..................................... 58

iPod , connection................................... 228

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 37

J

Jack......................................................... 179

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 262

Key

keyless lock and ignition system........ 118

remote control key.............................. 112

Key blade......................................... 113, 119

active locks......................................... 117

Keyless drive............................ 118, 138, 278

starting the car.................................... 138

Keyless entry............................................. 72

Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 118

Keypad in the steering wheel...... 60, 62, 243

Key positions........................................... 136

Kick-down

automatic gearbox.............................. 141

L

Lambda-sond.......................................... 275

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 192

Lighting

approach light, duration....................... 69

automatic lighting............................... 101

automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 53

bulbs, specifications........................... 276

dipped beam........................................ 53

display lighting...................................... 54

front fog lamps..................................... 54

headlamp levelling................................ 53

home safe lighting.......................... 55, 69

in passenger compartment................. 100

lighting panel, passenger compart-

ment...................................................... 53

main/dipped beam......................... 53, 55

position/parking lamps......................... 53

reading lamps..................................... 100

rear fog lamp........................................ 54

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 210

cargo area........................................... 214

courtesy lighting................................. 214

dipped beam...................................... 211

direction indicators............................. 212

fog lamp.............................................. 213

12 Alphabetical Index

12

285

front.................................................... 210

interior lighting, roof............................ 215

main beam.......................................... 211

number plate lighting.......................... 214

parking lamps..................................... 212

position lamps.................................... 212

rear lamp............................................. 213

side marker lamps.............................. 212

vanity mirror........................................ 215

Loading

general................................................ 167

load capacity...................................... 167

load retaining eyelets.......................... 107

ski hatch............................................. 108

Load retaining eyelets.............................. 107

Locking.................................................... 119

unlocking............................................ 122

Locking/unlocking................................... 122

inside.................................................. 123

outside................................................ 122

Locks

locking................................................ 122

Lubricants................................................ 269

Lubricants, capacities.............................. 269

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 53

Main beam

flashing................................................. 55

Main beam "flash"..................................... 55

Maintenance............................................ 199

rustproofing........................................ 195

self-maintenance................................ 199

Making calls..................................... 244, 252

Manual gearbox....................................... 139

towing and recovery........................... 155

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 141

Memory function in seats.......................... 94

Menus

audio system...................................... 226

Menu structure.......................................... 71

media player....................................... 240

phone, menu options.......................... 249

phone, overview................................. 248

Messages in BLIS.................................... 153

Messages in the information display......... 50

Meters in the combined instrument panel

fuel gauge............................................. 45

outside temperature gauge.................. 45

speedometer......................................... 45

tachometer........................................... 45

trip meter.............................................. 45

Misting

attending to the windows..................... 78

condensation in headlamps............... 190

removing with defroster function.......... 81

timer function........................................ 81

Mobile phone

connect............................................... 253

handsfree............................................ 251

register phone..................................... 251

N

News........................................................ 234

O

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 203, 265

One-key dial............................................. 246

Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13

Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 158

12 Alphabetical Index

12

286

P

PACOS....................................................... 23

PACOS, switch.......................................... 23

Paintwork

colour code......................................... 194

damage and touch-up........................ 194

Parking assistance................................... 149

parking assistance sensors................ 150

Parking brake....................................... 48, 64

Parking heater

battery and fuel..................................... 84

general.................................................. 84

parking on a hill.................................... 84

symbols and display messages............ 85

time setting........................................... 86

Particle filter............................................. 273

Passenger compartment filter................... 78

Passenger compartment heater

fuel-driven............................................. 84

Personal preferences................................. 71

approach light, duration....................... 72

auto blower adjust................................ 71

automatic locking................................. 72

doors unlock......................................... 72

home safe lighting................................ 72

keyless entry......................................... 72

lock confirm. light................................. 72

recirculation timer................................. 71

unlock confirm. light............................. 72

Petrol grade............................................. 272

Phone

calling from the phone book............... 246

connect............................................... 253

controls............................................... 243

entering text........................................ 245

handsfree............................................ 251

incoming calls..................................... 252

making calls........................................ 252

on/off.................................................. 244

one-key dial........................................ 246

phone book......................................... 254

phone book, shortcut......................... 254

receiving a call.................................... 252

register phone..................................... 251

standby, standby mode...................... 244

traffic safety........................................ 243

Phone book

handling numbers............................... 245

Phone system.......................................... 242

Polishing.................................................. 191

Power seat................................................. 93

Power steering fluid, checking and topping

up............................................................. 206

Power windows......................................... 65

passenger seat..................................... 66

Privacy locking......................................... 115

Programme type...................................... 235

PTY Programme type........................... 234

Puncture, see Tyres......................... 179, 182

Putting calls on hold................................ 244

R

Radio

EON.................................................... 235

frequency update................................ 235

news................................................... 234

programme types............................... 233

radio settings...................................... 232

radio stations...................................... 232

REG.................................................... 235

Radio text................................................ 235

Rain sensor................................................ 59

Random, CD and audio files.................... 238

RDS functions.......................................... 233

resetting.............................................. 236

12 Alphabetical Index

12

287

Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 100

Rear seat

boarding............................................... 90

Rearview and door mirrors

automatic retracting/extending...... 69, 72

compass............................................... 67

door...................................................... 69

electrically retractable........................... 69

interior................................................... 67

Recirculation

ECC...................................................... 81

Reduced guard

settings................................................. 72

Refrigerant................................................. 78

Refuelling

fuel cap............................................... 134

fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 134

fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 134

refuelling............................................. 134

Refusing a call......................................... 244

REG - Regional radio programmes......... 235

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 216

Remote control........................................ 112

programmable...................................... 73

replacing the battery........................... 121

Remote control key................................. 137

battery replacement............................ 121

detachable key blade......................... 113

functions............................................. 112

Remote control key system, type appro-

val............................................................ 278

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 69

Reverse gear inhibitor

five-speed........................................... 139

six-speed, petrol................................. 139

Rims

cleaning.............................................. 190

Roll-over protection................................... 30

Roof

error messages..................................... 97

hatch cover........................................... 96

lowering................................................ 95

opening and closing............................. 96

temporary covering............................... 98

ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 30

ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll-

over protection).......................................... 30

Rustproofing............................................ 195

S

Safety

safety systems, table............................ 31

Scan

CD and audio files.............................. 238

radio stations...................................... 233

Seatbelt

pregnancy............................................. 17

seatbelt guide....................................... 18

seatbelt tensioner................................. 18

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17

Seatbelts.................................................... 16

Seats

manual setting...................................... 90

power seat............................................ 93

Service programme................................. 198

Side airbags............................................... 25

Side airbag SIPS........................................ 25

SIM card.................................................. 242

SIPS bags.................................................. 25

Ski hatch.................................................. 108

SMS......................................................... 247

read..................................................... 247

write.................................................... 247

12 Alphabetical Index

12

288

Soot filter........................................... 50, 274

Soot filter full............................................ 274

Sound

audio settings............................. 228, 229

audio source....................................... 228

volume................................................ 228

Spare wheel............................................. 179

temporary spare......................... 174, 179

Spin control............................................. 147

SRS Airbag................................................ 20

SRS system............................................... 20

general.................................................. 20

Stability and traction control system....... 147

Stains....................................................... 192

Standby, phone....................................... 244

Start assistance....................................... 158

Starting the engine.................................. 136

keyless drive............................... 118, 138

Steering lock............................................ 136

Steering wheel

cruise control........................................ 60

keypad.................................... 60, 62, 243

steering wheel adjustment.................... 63

Stone chips and scratches...................... 194

Storage compartment.............................. 102

CD discs............................................. 104

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-

ment......................................................... 102

Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 232

Subwoofer............................................... 229

Surround.......................................... 226, 230

Symbols................................................... 148

indicator symbols........................... 47, 48

warning symbols................................... 46

Symbols and display messages

parking heater....................................... 85

T

Tailgate

locking/unlocking................................ 112

Tank volume............................................ 271

Technical data, engine............................. 264

Temperature

passenger compartment, electronic cli-

mate control.......................................... 82

Testing the alarm system......................... 128

Timer

ECC...................................................... 81

Tools........................................................ 179

Total airing function................................. 123

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 161

Towing..................................................... 155

towing eye.......................................... 156

Towing capacity....................................... 262

Towing equipment................................... 161

installation........................................... 163

removing............................................. 165

specifications...................................... 162

Towing eye.............................................. 156

TP Traffic information............................ 234

Traffic information.................................... 234

Trailer....................................................... 159

cable................................................... 161

Trip computer............................................ 56

Tuning Radio............................................ 232

Type approval, remote control key sys-

tem........................................................... 278

Type designation..................................... 258

12 Alphabetical Index

12

289

Tyres

direction of rotation............................ 175

driving characteristics......................... 172

general................................................ 172

maintenance....................................... 172

pressure...................................... 176, 177

puncture repair................................... 184

specifications...................................... 172

speed ratings...................................... 172

tread wear indicators.......................... 173

winter tyres......................................... 175

U

Unlocking......................................... 119, 122

settings................................................. 72

USB, connection...................................... 228

V

Ventilation.................................................. 79

Vibration damper..................................... 161

Volume

audio system...................................... 228

auto volume control............................ 231

media player....................................... 228

programme types............................... 236

W

Warning lamp

stability and traction control system. . 147

Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 19

Warning triangle....................................... 179

Washer fluid, filling................................... 204

Washers

headlamps............................................ 58

washer fluid, filling.............................. 204

windscreen........................................... 58

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 70

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 192

Waxing..................................................... 191

Weights

kerb weight......................................... 262

Wheels

changing............................................. 182

installation........................................... 183

removal............................................... 182

rims..................................................... 174

snow chains........................................ 173

spare wheel........................................ 179

Whiplash injury.......................................... 28

WHIPS

child seat/booster cushion................... 28

whiplash injury...................................... 28

Wind deflector........................................... 99

Windscreen wipers.................................... 58

rain sensor............................................ 59

Winter tyres.............................................. 175

Wiper blades............................................ 207

cleaning.............................................. 207

replacing, windscreen......................... 207

12 Alphabetical Index

12

290

Notes

291

Notes

292

Notes

293

Notes

294

Notes

295

Notes

296

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the C70 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo C70 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo C70. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2010 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.